Asus M4A89GTD PRO User Manual
Motherboard M4A89GTD PRO
ii E5290 First Edition (V1) February 2010 Copyright © 2010 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîed or altered, unless such repair , modiîcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneît, without intent to infringe. Offer to Provide Source Code of Certain Software This product may contain copyrighted software that is licensed under the General Public License (âGPLâ) and under the Lesser General Public License V ersion (âLGPLâ). The GPL and LGPL licensed code in this product is distributed without any warranty . Copies of these licenses are included in this product. Y ou may obtain the complete corresponding source code (as deîned in the GPL) for the GPL Software, and/or the complete corresponding source code of the LGPL Software (with the complete machine- readable âwork that uses the Libraryâ) for a period of three years after our last shipment of the product including the GPL Software and/or LGPL Software, which will be no earlier than December 1, 201 1, either (1) for free by downloading it from http://support.asus.com/download ; or (2) for the cost of reproduction and shipment, which is dependent on the preferred carrier and the location where you want to have it shipped to, by sending a request to: ASUST eK Computer Inc. Legal Compliance Dept. 15 Li T e Rd., Beitou, T aipei 1 12 T aiwan In your request please provide the name, model number and version, as stated in the About Box of the product for which you wish to obtain the corresponding source code and your contact details so that we can coordinate the terms and cost of shipment with you. The source code will be distributed WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY and licensed under the same license as the corresponding binary/object code. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information. ASUST eK is eager to duly provide complete source code as required under various Free Op en Source Software licenses. If however you encounter any problems in obtaining the full corresponding source code we would be much obliged if you give us a notiîcation to the email address gpl@asus.com , stating the product and describing the problem (please do NOT send large attachments such as source code archives etc to this email address).
iii Contents Contents ...................................................................................................................... iii Notices ...................................................................................................................... vii Safety information .................................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................................... ix M4A89GTD PRO speciîcations summary ............................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features .......................................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................................ 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Processor .................................. 1-2 1.3.3 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Switches* ................................... 1-3 1.3.4 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid OS ............................................. 1-3 1.3.5 ASUS unique features ................................................................. 1-3 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ............................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Motherboard layout ..................................................................... 2-2 2.2.2 Layout contents ........................................................................... 2-3 2.2.3 Placement direction ..................................................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Screw holes ................................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ....................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ............................................ 2-7 2.4 System memory ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations .............................................................. 2-1 1 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ...................................................................... 2-16 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................................... 2-16 2.5 Expansion slots ........................................................................................ 2-17 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ...................................................... 2-17 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card ................................................. 2-17 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................................ 2-18 2.5.4 PCI slots .................................................................................... 2-19 2.5.5 PCI Express 2.0 x4 / x1 slots .................................................... 2-19 2.5.6 PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots ......................................................... 2-19 2.6 Jumper ...................................................................................................... 2-21 2.7 Onboard switches .................................................................................... 2-22
iv Contents 2.8 Connectors ............................................................................................... 2-25 2.8.1 Rear panel connectors .............................................................. 2-25 2.8.2 Audio I/O connections ............................................................... 2-28 2.8.3 Internal connectors .................................................................... 2-30 2.8.4. ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) .......................................... 2-38 2.9 Onboard LEDs .......................................................................................... 2-39 2.10 Starting up for the îrst time .................................................................... 2-41 2.1 1 T urning off the computer ......................................................................... 2-41 Chapter 3: BIOS setup 3.1 Knowing BIOS ............................................................................................ 3-1 3.2 Updating BIOS ............................................................................................ 3-1 3.2.1 ASUS Update utility ..................................................................... 3-2 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ............................................................... 3-4 3.2.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ................................................... 3-5 3.2.4 ASUS BIOS Updater ................................................................... 3-6 3.3 BIOS setup program .................................................................................. 3-9 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen ...................................................................... 3-9 3.3.2 Menu bar ..................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.3 Navigation keys ......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.4 Menu items ................................................................................ 3-10 3.3.5 Submenu items ......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.6 Conîguration îelds ................................................................... 3-10 3.3.7 Pop-up window .......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.8 Scroll bar ................................................................................... 3-10 3.3.9 General help .............................................................................. 3-10 3.4 Main menu ................................................................................................ 3-1 1 3.4.1 SA T A 1â6 .................................................................................. 3-1 1 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration ............................................................... 3-13 3.4.3 System Information ................................................................... 3-14 3.5 Ai T weaker menu ...................................................................................... 3-15 3.5.1 CPU Level UP ........................................................................... 3-15 3.5.2 OC T uner Utility ......................................................................... 3-16 3.5.3 Ai Overclock T uner .................................................................... 3-16 3.5.4 CPU Ratio ................................................................................. 3-17 3.5.5 DRAM Frequency ...................................................................... 3-17 3.5.6 CPU/NB Frequency ................................................................... 3-17 3.5.7 HT Link Speed .......................................................................... 3-17 3.5.8 DRAM T iming Conîguration ...................................................... 3-17
v 3.5.9 DRAM Driving Conîguration ..................................................... 3-18 3.5.10 CPU & NB V oltage Mode .......................................................... 3-19 3.5.1 1 CPU VDDA Voltage ................................................................... 3-19 3.5.12 DRAM V oltage ........................................................................... 3-19 3.5.13 CPU Load-Line Calibration ....................................................... 3-20 3.5.14 CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration ................................................. 3-20 3.5.15 CPU Spread Spectrum .............................................................. 3-20 3.5.16 PCIE Spread Spectrum ............................................................. 3-20 3.5.17 HT V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.18 NB V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.19 NB 1.8V V oltage ........................................................................ 3-20 3.5.20 SB V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.21 SidePort Memory V oltage ......................................................... 3-20 3.5.22 Internal Graphics Mode ............................................................. 3-21 3.5.23 GFX Engine Clock Override ...................................................... 3-21 3.6 Advanced menu ....................................................................................... 3-22 3.6.1 CPU Conîguration .................................................................... 3-22 3.6.2 Chipset ...................................................................................... 3-23 3.6.3 Onboard Devices Conîguration ................................................ 3-26 3.6.4 USB Conîguration .................................................................... 3-27 3.6.5 PCIPnP ..................................................................................... 3-28 3.7 Power menu .............................................................................................. 3-29 3.7.1 Suspend Mode .......................................................................... 3-29 3.7.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume .................................................... 3-29 3.7.3 ACPI 2.0 Support ...................................................................... 3-29 3.7.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................................... 3-29 3.7.5 APM Conîguration .................................................................... 3-30 3.7.6 Hardware Monitor ...................................................................... 3-31 3.8 Boot menu ................................................................................................ 3-33 3.8.1 Boot Device Priority ................................................................... 3-33 3.8.2 Boot Settings Conîguration ...................................................... 3-34 3.8.3 Security ..................................................................................... 3-35 3.9 T ools menu ............................................................................................... 3-37 3.9.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 ...................................................................... 3-37 3.9.2 Express Gate ............................................................................ 3-37 3.9.3 ASUS O.C. Proîle ..................................................................... 3-38 3.9.4 AI NET 2 .................................................................................... 3-39 3.9.5 POST State LEDs ..................................................................... 3-39 3.10 Exit menu .................................................................................................. 3-40 Contents
vi Chapter 4: Software support 4.1 Installing an operating system ................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Support DVD information .......................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Running the support DVD ........................................................... 4-1 4.2.2 Obtaining the software manuals .................................................. 4-2 4.3 Software information ................................................................................. 4-3 4.3.1 ASUS PC Probe II ....................................................................... 4-3 4.3.2 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................................. 4-4 4.3.3 ASUS Fan Xpert .......................................................................... 4-5 4.3.4 ASUS EPU .................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.5 ASUS Express Gate .................................................................... 4-7 4.3.6 Audio conîgurations .................................................................... 4-8 4.3.7 ASUS GPU Boost ....................................................................... 4-9 4.4 ASUS Unique Overclocking UtilityâT urboV EVO ................................. 4-10 4.4.1 Using ASUS T urboV .................................................................. 4-10 4.4.2 Using ASUS T urboV Auto Tuning Mode .................................... 4-1 1 4.4.3 Using CPU Level UP ................................................................. 4-12 4.4.4 Using ASUS T urbo Key ............................................................. 4-12 4.5 RAID conîgurations ................................................................................ 4-13 4.5.1 RAID deînitions ........................................................................ 4-13 4.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ................................................. 4-14 4.5.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS .................................................. 4-14 4.5.4 AMD ® Option ROM Utility .......................................................... 4-15 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................................................... 4-18 4.6.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS ................ 4-18 4.6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows ® .................................. 4-18 4.6.3 Installing the RAID driver during Windows ® OS installation ...... 4-18 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive ................................................... 4-19 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support 5.1 A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology .................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Requirements .............................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Before you begin ......................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Installing two CrossFireX⢠graphics cards ................................ 5-2 5.1.4 Installing the device drivers ......................................................... 5-3 5.1.5 Enabling the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology ............................... 5-3 5.2 A TI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology ...................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 System requirements .................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 5-4 5.2.3 Installing AMD Chipset Driver ..................................................... 5-4 5.2.4 Using the A TI ® CA T AL YST ® Control Center ................................ 5-5 Contents
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we published the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://green.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. DO NOT throw the motherboard in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. DO NOT throw the mercury-containing button cell battery in municipal waste. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Ensu re tha t your power supply is set to th e co rrect voltage in yo ur area . If y ou are not su re abou t the voltage of th e elect rical outlet you are u sing, c ontact your l ocal p ower co mpany . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, ensure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer .
ix About this guide Th is u se r gu id e co nt ai ns t he in fo rm at io n yo u ne ed w he n i ns ta ll in g an d co nî gu ri ng t he m ot he rb oa rd. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 4: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package and the software. ⢠Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support This chapter describes the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠feature and shows the graphics card installation procedures. Where to înd more information Refe r to t he foll owing sources for a dditio nal inform ation a nd for produc t and softwar e upda tes. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o ensure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italic s Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key . Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <K ey 1> < Ke y2 > <K ey 3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task.
xi M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) CPU AMD ® Socket AM3; Phenom⢠II / Athlon⢠II / Sempron⢠100 Series Processors AMD ® 140W CPU Support AMD ® Cool ânâ Quiet⢠T echnology Supports 45nm CPU Chipset AMD ® 890GX / SB850 System bus Up to 5200 MT/s; HyperT ransport⢠3.0 Memory 4 x DIMM, max. 16GB, DDR3 2000(O.C.) / 1333 / 1066 MHz, ECC / non-ECC, un-buffered memory Dual channel memory architecture * When you install a total memory of 4 GB capacity or more, Windows ® 32-bit operating system may only recognize less than 3 GB. We recommend using a maximum of 3 GB system memory if you are using a Windows ® 32-bit OS. ** Refer to www .asus.com or this user manual for the Memory QVL (Qualiîed V endors Lists) Expansion slots 2 x PC I Ex pre ss 2.0 x16 sl ots, sup por t A TI ® Cr ossF ireX ⢠Q uad- GPU T echnology (@ dual x8 speed) 1 x PCI Express 2.0 x4 slot 1 x PCI Express 2.0 x1 slot 2 x PCI slots VGA Output Integrated A TI ® Radeon⢠HD 4290 GPU Multi-VGA output support: HDMI, DVI-D, and RGB ports Supports HDMI with max. resolution 1920 x 1200 (1080P) Supports DVI with max. resolution 2560 x 1600 @60Hz Supports RGB with max. resolution 2560 x 1440 @75Hz Supports H.264, VC-1, MPEG-2, DirectX 10.1 and OpenGL 2.0 Supports Shader Model 4.1, Universal Video Decoder (UVD) 2.0 Maximum UMA memory size: 512 MB 128 MB DDR3 1333 sideport memory support Hybrid CrossFireX support Storage AMD ® SB850 chipset - 6 x SA T A 6.0 Gb/s ports with RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10 support JMicron ® JMB361 P A T A and SA T A controller - 1 x Power eSA T A 3.0 Gb/s port - 1 x Ultra DMA 133/100 for up to 2 P A T A devices LAN Realtek ® 81 1 1E Gigabit LAN controller featuring AI NET2 Audio ALC892 8-channel High Deînition Audio CODEC - BD Audio Layer Content Protection - Supports 192khz/24bit T rue BD Lossless Sound - DTS Surround Sensation UltraPC - Supports Jack-Detection, Multi-Streaming, and Front Panel Jack-Retasking - Optical S/PDIF Out port at back I/O - ASUS Noise Filter USB 14 x USB 2.0 ports (8 ports at midboard, 6 ports at back panel)
xii (continued on the next page) M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary IEEE 1394 VIA ® VT6308P controller supports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports (one at midboard, one at back panel) ASUS unique features ASUS Xtreme Design ASUS Hybrid Processor â TurboV EVO - TurboV, Auto Tuning, CPU Level UP and GPU Boost ASUS Hybrid OS â Express Gate ASUS Hybrid Switches - Turbo Key II - Core Unlocker ASUS Power Solutions - 8 2 Phase Power Design - ASUS EPU ASUS Exclusive Features - MemOK! ASUS Quiet Thermal Solutions - ASUS Fanless Design: Heat pipe solution - ASUS Fan Xpert ASUS EZ DIY - ASUS Q-Design - ASUS O.C. Proîle - ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 - ASUS EZ Flash 2 - ASUS MyLogo 2⢠- Multi-language BIOS ASUS exclusive overclocking features Precision T weaker 3 - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.003125V increment - vDDNB : Adjusta ble CPU NB volt age at 0.00312 5V i ncrement - vCPU PLL: Adjustable CPU PLL voltage at 0.00625V increment - vHT Bus: Adjustable PCH voltage at 0.00625V increment - vDRAM Bus: Adjustable DRAM voltage at 0.00625V increment - vChipset: Ad justable Chipset voltag e at 0.00625V incremen t SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) - Internal Base Clock tuning from 100MHz up to 600MHz at 1MHz increment - PCI Express frequency tuning from 100MHz up to 150MHz at 1MHz increment Overclocking protection - ASUS C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall)
xiii *Speciîcations are subject to change without notice. M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary Back panel I/O ports 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x HDMI Out port 1 x DVI-D Out port 1 x D-Sub Out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Extternal SA T A port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 6 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports 8-channel Audio I/O ports Internal I/O connectors 4 x USB connectors support additional 8 USB ports 1 x IDE connector 6 x SA T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors 1 x CPU Fan connector 2 x Chassis Fan connectors (1 x 4-pin, 1 x 3-pin) 1 x Power Fan connector 1 x IEEE1394a connector 1 x S/PDIF Out header 1 x Core Unlocker switch 1 x T urbo Key II switch 1 x MemOK! button Front panel audio connector 1 x COM connector 24-pin A TX Power connector 8-pin EA TX 12V Power connector System Panel BIOS features 16 Mb Flash ROM, SPI, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI 2.0, WfM 2.0, SM B IOS 2.5, ACPI 2.0a, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flas h 2, ASUS Cr ashF ree BIOS 3 Manageability WfM 2.0, DMI 2.0, WOL by PME, WOR by PME, PXE Support DVD contents Drivers ASUS Utilities ASUS Update Anti-virus software (OEM version) Form factor A TX form factor: 12 in. x 9.6 in. (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm)
xiv
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 1-1 Chapter 1 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® M4A89GTD PRO motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. ⢠If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ⢠The illustrated items above are for reference only . Actual product speciîcations may vary with different models. User Manual ASUS M4A89GTD PRO motherboard User guide Support DVD 2 x Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s cables with 6.0 Gb /s l abel 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s cables 1 x Ultra DMA 133/ 100/66 cable 1 x ASUS Q-Shield 1 x VGA switch card 1 x 2-i n- 1 AS US Q- Co nne ct or ki t
1-2 Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights AM D ® P hen om⢠II / Ath lon ⢠I I / Se mpr on⢠1 00 Se rie s Pr oce sso rs (s oc ket AM3 ) This motherboard supports AMD ® AM3 multi-core processors with unique L3 cache and delivers better overclocking capabilities with less power consumption. It features dual-channel DDR3 1333 memory support and accelerates data transfer rate up to 5200MT/s via HyperT ransport⢠3.0 based system bus. This motherboard also supports AMD ® CPUs in the new 45nm manufacturing process. AMD ® 890GX Chipset AMD ® 890GX Chipset is designed to support up to 5200MT/s HyperT ransport⢠3.0 (HT 3.0) interface speed and PCI Express⢠2.0 x16 graphics. It is optimized with AMD ® âs latest AM3 and multi-core CPUs to provide excellent system performance and overclocking capabilities. Dual-Channel DDR3 2000(O.C.) / 1333 / 1066 support The mother board s upport s DDR3 memory that feat ures d ata tra nsfer rates o f 2000 (O.C.) / 1333 / 106 6 MHz t o meet the hi gher b andwid th r equire ments o f the latest 3D gra phics, mult imedia , and I nterne t appli cation s. Th e dual -channe l DDR3 archit ecture enlarg es the band width of your syste m memor y to b oost s yste m perf ormance . Refe r to pa ge 2-1 0 for d etails . A TI ® CrossFireX⢠T echnology A TIâs CrossFireX⢠boosts image quality along with rendering speed, eliminating the need to scale down screen resolution to get high quality images. CrossFireX⢠allows higher antialiasing, anisotropic îltering, shading, and texture settings. Adjust your display conîgurations, experiment with the advanced 3D settings, and check the effects with a real-time 3D-rendered previews within A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center . AMD ® SB850 Chipset The AMD ® SB850 Southbridge natively supports the next generation SA T A 6.0 Gb/s data transfer rate and PCI Express 2.0 interface. 1.3.2 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Processor* T urboV EVO The ultimate O.C. processor satisîes every level of overclockersâfrom die-hard enthusiasts to beginners. Auto tuning intelligently pushes the system to the fastest clock speeds while maintaining stability . Turbo Key boosts performance with just one touch; while TurboV of fers more options to advanced overclockers to achieve world O.C. record. Moreover , upgrade your CPU at no additional cost with CPU Level UP! Refer to page 4-10 for details. Auto T uning Auto T uning is an intelligent tool that automates overclocking to achieve a total system level up. This tool also provides stability testing. Even O.C. beginners can achieve extreme yet stable overclocking results with Auto T uning!
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 1-3 Chapter 1 GPU Boost GPU Boost overclocks the integrated GPU in real time for the best graphics performance. User-friendly UI facilitates îexible frequency and voltage adjustments. Its ability to deliver multiple overclocking proîles also provides rapid and stable system-level upgrades. Refer to page 4-9 for details. 1.3.3 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Switches* T urbo Key II Enjo y supe rb perf ormanc e by au to-tun ing yo ur p rocess or to a n extr eme yet stabl e state . Simp ly acti vate a dedica ted sw itch on the m otherb oard to un leash e xtra p rocessi ng cap abiliti es. Refer to page 2-23 for details. Core Unlocker ASUS Core Unlocker simpliîes the activation of a latent AMD ® CPUâwith just a simple switch. Enjoy an instant performance boost by simply unlocking the extra cores, without performing complicated BIOS changes. Refer to page 2-24 for details. * The actual overclocking result depends on the system conîguration. 1.3.4 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid OS Express Gate Expr ess Ga te is a n ASUS exclusi ve OS that p rovi des yo u with quick access to the Intern et and key applic ations before enteri ng the Windo ws ® OS. Refer to pag es 3-3 7 and 4 -7 for detai ls. 1.3.5 ASUS unique features ASUS Power Solutions ASUS Power solutions intelligently and automatically provide balanced computing power and energy consumption. 8 2 Phase Power Design T o fully unleash the next-generation AM3 CPUâs potential, the ASUS M4A89GTD PRO motherboard has adopted the brand new 8-phase VRM power design, which delivers high power efîciency and supreme overclocking ability . These high quality power components effectively lower system temperature to ensure longer component lifespan. This motherboard also features an extra 2 phase power dedicated to integrated memory/HT controller . ASUS EPU The ASUS EPU (Energy Processing Unit) provides total system power management by detecting current PC loadings and intelligently moderating power usage for critical PC components in real-timeâhelping save power and money! Refer to page 4-6 for details. MemOK! Memory compatibility is among the top concerns during computer upgrades. Worry no more. MemOK! is the fastest memory booting solution today . This remarkable memory rescue tool requires nothing but a push of a button to patch memory issues and get your system up and running in no time. The technology is able to determine failsafe settings that can dramatically improve your system booting success. Refer to page 2-22 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1 ASUS Quiet Thermal Solutions ASUS Quiet Thermal solution makes system more stable and enhances the overclocking capability . ASUS Fanless DesignâHeat pipe solution The ASUS heat pipe features 0-dB thermal solution that offers users a noiseless PC environment. Not only the beautiful shape upgrades the visual enjoyment for motherboard users, but also the heat pipe design lowers the temperature of the chipset and power phase area through high efîcient heat-exchange. Combined with usability and aesthetics, the ASUS heat pipe will give users an extremely silent and cooling experience with the elegant appearance! Fan Xpert ASUS Fan Xpert intelligently allows you to adjust both the CPU and chassis fan speeds according to different ambient temperatures caused by dif ferent climate conditions in different geographic regions and your PCâs loading. The built-in variety of useful proîles offer îexible controls of fan speed to achieve a quiet and cool environment. Refer to page 4-5 for details. ASUS EZ DIY ASUS EZ DIY feature collection provides you with easy ways to install computer components, update the BIOS or back up your favorite settings. ASUS Q-Design ASUS Q-Design enhances your DIY experience. Both of Q-Slot and Q-DIMM design speed up and simplify the DIY process! ASUS O.C. Proîle The motherboard features the ASUS O.C. Proîle that allows you to conveniently store or load multiple BIOS settings. The BIOS settings can be stored in the CMOS or a separate île, giving you the freedom to share and distribute your favorite settings. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 allows you to restore corrupted BIOS data from a USB îash disk containing the BIOS île. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. ASUS EZ-Flash 2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly utility that allows you to update the BIOS without using a bootable îoppy disk or an OS-based utility . Refer to page 3-4 for details. Precision T weaker 3 Allows you to adjust the CPU/NB voltage in 0.003125V steps and DRAM voltage in 0.00625V steps to îne-tune voltage to achieve the most precise setting for the ultimate overclocking conîguration.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-1 Chapter 2 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Before handling components, use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, or components. Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.2.1 Motherboard layout Refer to 2.8 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors. 2.2 Motherboard overview
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-3 Chapter 2 2.2.2 Layout contents Connectors/Jumpers/Slots Page 1. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) 2-36 2. AM3 CPU Socket 2-5 3. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 4-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_FAN2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 2-34 4. DDR3 DIMM slots 2-10 5. Core Unlocker switch (CORE_UNLOCKER) 2-24 6. T urbo Key II switch (TURBO_KEY_II) 2-23 7. MemOK! switch 2-22 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-32 9. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE) 2-30 10. Standby power LED (SB_PWR) 2-39 1 1. AMD ® SB850 Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors (7-pin SA T A1â6) 2-31 12. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) 2-37 13. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC) 2-21 14. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12, USB1314) 2-33 15. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) 2-35 16. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) 2-32 17. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-35
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.2.3 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, ensure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.4 Screw holes Place nine screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. DO NOT overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-5 Chapter 2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with an AM3 socket designed for AMD ® Phenom⢠II / Athlon⢠II / Sempron⢠100 Series Processors. The AM3 socket has a different pinout from the 940-pin socket designed for the AMD Opteron processor . Ensure that you use a CPU designed for the AM3 socket. The CPU îts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! Ensure that all power cables are unplugged before installing the CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Ensure that the socket lever is lifted up to a 90º angle. Otherwise, the CPU will not ît in completely . 2. Press the lever sideways to unlock the socket, then lift it up to a 90º angle. Socket lever
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that the CPU corner with the gold triangle matches the sock et corner with a small triangle. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it îts in place. 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold triangle Small triangle 6. Apply s ome Ther mal In ter fac e Mate ria l to the exposed area of the CPU that the heatsink will be in contact with, ensuring that it is spread in an even thin layer . Some heatsinks come with pre-applied thermal paste. If so, skip this step. The Thermal Interface Material is toxic and inedib le. DO NOT eat it. If it gets into your eyes or touches your skin, wash it off immediately , and seek professional medical help. T o prevent contaminating the paste, DO NOT spread the paste with your înger .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-7 Chapter 2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The AMD ® AM3 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, ensuring that the heatsink îts properly on the retention module base. Y our boxed CPU heatsink and fan assembly should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter . ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠Y ou do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , ensure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Ensure that you use only AMD-certiîed heatsink and fan assembly . R e t e n t i o n m o d u l e base CPU heatsink CPU fan Retention bracket lock Retention bracket
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2. Attach one end of the retention bracket to the retention module base. 3. Align the other end of the retention bracket to the retention module base. A clicking sound denotes that the retention bracket is in place. 4. Push down the retention bracket lock on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. Ensure that the fan and heatsink assembly perfectly îts the retention mechanism module base, otherwise you cannot snap the retention bracket in place.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-9 Chapter 2 5. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . ⢠This connector is backward compatible with old 3-pin CPU fan.
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 3 (DDR3) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR3 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR2 DIMM but is notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR2 DIMM socket. DDR3 modules are developed for better performance with less power consumption. The îgure illustrates the location of the DDR3 DIMM sockets: Recommended memory conîgurations One DIMM: Install one memory module in any slot as a single-channel operation. T wo DIMMs (dual-channel operation): Four DIMMs (dual-channel operation):
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-1 1 Chapter 2 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations Y ou may install 512MB, 1GB, 2GB and 4GB unbuffered ECC and non-ECC DDR3 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠The default memory operation frequency is dependent on its Serial Presence Detect (SPD), which is the standard way of accessing information from a memory module. Under the default state, some memory modules for overclocking may operate at a lower frequency than the vendor-marked value. T o operate at the vendor-marked or at a higher frequency , refer to section 3.5 Ai T weaker menu for manual memory frequency adjustment. ⢠For system stability , use a more efîcient memory cooling system to support a full memory load (4 DIMMs) or overclocking condition. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠We recommend that you install the memory modules from the blue slots for better overclocking capability . ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠Due to the memory address limitation on 32-bit Windows OS, when you install 4GB or more memory on the motherboard, the actual usable memory for the OS can be about 3GB or less. For effective use of memory , we recommend that you do any of the following: - Use a maximum of 3GB system memory if you are using a 32-bit Windows OS. - Install a 64-bit Windows OS when you want to install 4GB or more on the motherboard. For more details, refer to the Microsoft ® support site at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/929605/en-us. ⢠This motherboard does not support DIMMs made up of 512Mb (64MB) chips or less (Memory chip capacity counts in Megabit, 8 Megabit/Mb = 1 Megabyte/MB).
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1066 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing Voltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM Crucial CT25672BA1067.18FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 7 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8EDF0-AE-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ1 1UD8BAFA-AG-E 1GB DS ELPIDA J5308BASE-AC-E 8 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BAW0-AE-E 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108BABG-DJ-E 7 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8EDF0-AE-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠Hynix HMT112U6AFP8C-G7N0 1GB SS HYNIX H5TQ1G83AFPG7C 7 - ⢠Hynix HYMT112U64ZNF8-G7 1GB SS HYNIX HY5TQ1G831ZNFP-G7 7 - ⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6AFP8C-G7N0 2GB DS HYNIX H5TQ1G83AFPG7C 7 - ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1333 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 D IMM 2 D IMM 4 DI MM A-DA TA AD3133301GOU 1GB SS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠A-DA TA AD31333002GOU 2GB DS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠⢠A-DA TA AD3U1333B2G9-2 2GB DS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1333PB2G7-2P 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1 .6 5-1 .8 5 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD3U1333C4G9-B 4GB DS Hynix H5TQ2G83AFRH9C 1 33 3- 9- 9- 9 -2 4 - ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31333E002G0U 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1. 65 -1. 85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1333PB2G7-3P 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1 .6 5-1 .8 5 ⢠⢠⢠Apacer 78.A1GC6.9L1 2GB DS Apacer AM5D5808DEWSBG 9 - ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1333C9 (Ver2.1) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CM3X1024-1333C9DHX 1GB DS - - - 1.1 ⢠⢠CORSAIR BoxP/N:TWIN3X2048-1333C9 (CM3X1024-1333C9)V er1.1 2GB(2 x 1GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.70 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CM3X2G1333C9 2GB DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR Bo xP/N : TW 3X4G 133 3C9D HX (C M3X2 048 -133 3C9 DHX )V er3 .2 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.70 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1333C9 (Ver2.1) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX8GX3M4A1333C9 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12864BA1339.8FF 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12864BA1339.8SFD 1GB SS MICRON MT 8JF1 286 4A Y - 1G 4D1 - - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12872BA1339.9FF 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BN1337.16FF(XMP) 2GB DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25664BA1339.16FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25664BA1339.16SFD 2GB DS MICRON D9JNM - - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25672BA1339.18FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BA1336.16SFB1 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS NA - 6-6-6-20 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8BA W0-DJ-E 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108BABG-DJ-E 9 - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8BDF0-DJ-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108BDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8EDF0-DJ-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BA W0-DJ-E 2GB DS ELPIDA J1108BABG-DJ-E 9 - ⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BDF0-DJ-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108BDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8EDF0-DJ-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10600CL8D-2GBHK 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7T-6GBPK(XMP) 2GB DS - - 7-7-7-18 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7D-4GBPI(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-21 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7D-4GBRH(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-21 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3 -10 66 6CL 8D- 4G BEC O( XMP ) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.35 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-1 0666C L8D-4 GBHK( XMP ) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3- 106 66CL 8D- 4GBR M(X MP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL9T-6GBNQ 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠â¢
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-13 Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1333 MHz capability (cont.) V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 D IMM 4 DI MM GEIL GG34GB1333C9DC 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS GEIL GL1L128M88BA12N 9-9-9-24 1.3 ⢠⢠GEIL GV34GB1333C7DC 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.5 ⢠⢠Hynix HMT1 12U6BFR8C-H9 1GB SS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFR 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6BFR8C-H9 2GB DS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFR 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6BFR8C-H9 2GB DS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFRH9C 9 - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLFD45F-B8KG9 1GB SS KingMax K FB8 FN GBF -A NX- 15A - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLFE85F-B8KG9 2GB DS KingMax K FB8 FN GBF -A NX- 15A - ⢠⢠⢠KIN GSTO N KVR1333D3N9/1G 1G SS Kingston D1288JELDPGD9U - 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3N9/2G 2GB DS Qimonda IDSH 1G- 03A1 F1C -13H 9 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3E9S/4G 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 - 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3N9/4G 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 9 1.5 ⢠⢠MICRON MT8JTF12864AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON 9FF22 D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT8JTF12864AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT9JSF12872AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT16JF25664AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT16JTF25664AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON 9FF22 D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT18JSF25672AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V3GK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3G1333UL V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3G1333L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZX1333L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS NA - 8-8-8 1.6 ⢠⢠⢠PSC AL7F8G73D-DG1 1GB SS PSC A3P1GF3DGF - - ⢠⢠⢠PSC AL8F8G73D-DG1 2GB DS PSC A3P1GF3DGF - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B2873DZ1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B2873EH1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M391B2873DZ1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5673DZ1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5673EH1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M391B5673DZ1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5273BH1-CH9 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent W1333UX2G8(XMP) 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - 8 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠Asint SL Y3128M8-EDJ 1GB SS Asint DDRIII1208-DJ - - ⢠⢠⢠Asint SL Y3128M8-EDJE 1GB SS ELPIDA J1108BASE-DJ-E - - ⢠⢠Asint SLZ3128M8-EDJ 2GB DS Asint DDRIII1208-DJ - - ⢠⢠⢠Asint SLZ3128M8-EDJE 2GB DS ELPIDA J1108BASE-DJ-E - - ⢠⢠⢠ASUS N/A 1GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠A TP AQ28M64A8BJH9S 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ28M72D8BJH9S 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ56M64B8BJH9S 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ56M72E8BJH9S 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) - - ⢠⢠BUFF ALO FSH1333D3G-T3G(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 7-7-7-20 - ⢠⢠⢠EK Memor y EKM324L28BP8-I13 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HA9N-CG 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HC9N-CG 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠Patriot PVT33G1333ELK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVS34G1333LLK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.7 ⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1333ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠Silicon Power SP001GBL TU1333S01 1GB SS NANY A NT5CB128M8AN-CG - - ⢠⢠Silicon Power SP001GBL TU133S02 1GB SS S-POWER I0YT3E0 9 - ⢠Silicon Power SP002GBL TU133S02 2GB DS S-POWER I0YT3E0 9 - ⢠⢠⢠UMAX E41302GP0-73BDB 2GB DS UMAX U2S24D30TP-13 - ⢠â¢
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1600 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM A-DA TA AX3U1600PB1G8-2P 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31600E001GMU 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600PB1G8-3P 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-AG(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600XB2G7-EF(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31600F002GMU(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600XB2G7-FF(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C8D 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C8DV er2.1(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C9V er1.1(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMD4GX3M2A1600C8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMG4GX3M2A1600C7(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX4GX3M2A1600C9(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C8D 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C8DV er2.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C9V er2.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMD8GX3M4A1600C8(XMP) 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX8GX3M4A1600C9(XMP) 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠Crucial BL12864BA1608.8SFB(XMP) 1GB SS - - - 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BN1608.16FF(XMP) 2GB DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-2GBNQ 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.6 ⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-4GBRL 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.6 ⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL7D-4GBRH(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL8D-4GBRM(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-4GBECO(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.35 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL8T -6GBPI(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.6~1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9T -6GBNQ 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLGD45F-B8MF7(XMP) 1GB SS - - - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLGE85F-B8MF7(XMP) 2GB DS - - - ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/12GX(XMP) 12GB(3 x 4GB) DS - - - 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/12GX(XMP) 12GB(3 x 4GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3T1K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K2/4G 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - - 1.7~1.9 ⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3OB1600L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3P1600L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3X16004GK(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.9 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3G1600L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3X1600L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3X1600L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WP160UX4G8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WP160UX4G9(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WB160UX6G8(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - - - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WB160UX6G8(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8 - ⢠⢠⢠Cell Shock CS322271 2GB(2 x 1GB) DS - - 7-7-7-14 1.7-1.9 ⢠⢠EK Memory EKM324L28BP8-I16(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HA9N-DG(XMP) 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠⢠Mushkin 996657 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 - ⢠⢠⢠Mushkin 998659(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5-1.6 ⢠Patriot PVT33G1600ELK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠P ATRIOT PGS34G1600LLKA 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.7 ⢠Patriot PVS34G1600ELK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.8 ⢠â¢
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-15 Chapter 2 Visit the ASUS website for the latest QVL. Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: ⢠1 DIMM: Supports one (1) module inserted into any slot as Single-channel memory conîguration. ⢠2 DIMMs: Supports two (2) modules inserted into either the blue slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîguration. ⢠4 DIMMs: Supports four (4) modules inserted into both the blue and the black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîguration. V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM Patriot PVS34G1600LLK(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.9 ⢠Patriot PVS34G1600LLKN 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 2.0 ⢠Patriot PVT36G1600ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1600ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1600LLK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠T eam BoxP/N:TXD34096M1600HC6DC-L (TXD32048M1600HC6-L)(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 6-7-6-18 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1600 MHz capability (cont.) M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1800 MHz capability M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1866 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM KINGSTON KHX1800C9D3T1K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - - 1.65 ⢠V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM CORSAIR TR3X6G1866C9DV er4.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3RPR1866C9L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-2000 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM soc ket support (O ptional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM CORSAIR CMG4GX3M2A2000C8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠G.SKILL F3-16000CL7T-6GBPS(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-8-7-20 1.65 ⢠G.SKILL F3-16000CL9T-6GBPS(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠KINGSTON KHX2000C9D3T1FK3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠KINGSTON KHX2000C9D3T1K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3B2000L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-8-7 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-2133 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM KINGSTON KHX2133C8D3T1K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 â¢
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Ensure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM 1. Press the retaining clip outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. 3. Hold the DIMM by both of its ends, then insert the DIMM vertically into the socket. Apply force to both ends of the DIMM simultaneously until the retaining clip snaps back into place, and the DIMM cannot be pushed in any further to ensure proper sitting of the DIMM. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clip outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the DIMM slot key on the socket. A DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îts in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket in the wrong direction to avoid damaging the DIMM. Locked Retaining Clip 3 2 1 Always insert the DIMM into the socket VERTICALL Y to prevent DIMM notch damage. Unlocked retaining clip DIMM notch 1 2 DIMM slot key
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-17 Chapter 2 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following subs ections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 3 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Ensure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices. IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Redirect to IRQ#9 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 6 14 Reserved 7 15 Reserved 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 10 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 1 1 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 12 7 Reserved 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCIE x16_1 â â â shared â â â â PCIE x16_2 â â shared â â â â â PCIE x4_1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1_1 â shared â â â â â â PCI_1 â â â â shared â â â PCI_2 â â â â â shared â â LAN shared â â â â â â â Onboard 890GX Video Controller â â shared â â â â â Oncip SA T A Controller â â â shared â â â â Onboard JMB 36x SA T A Controller â â shared â â â â â 1394 Controller â â â â â â shared â HD Audio shared â â â â â â â
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-19 Chapter 2 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.5 PCI Express 2.0 x4 / x1 slots This motherboard supports PCI Express x4 / x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.6 PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots This motherboard has two PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots that support PCI Express 2.0 x16 graphics cards complying with the PCI Express speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. PCIe 2.0 x16_1 slot (gray , at x 8 link) PCIe 2.0 x4_1 slot PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue, single at x 16 or dual at x8 link) PCI slot 2 PCI slot 1 PCIe 2.0 x1_1 slot
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 ⢠In single VGA card mode, use îrst the PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue) for a PCI Express x16 graphics card to get better performance. ⢠We recommend that you provide sufîcient power when running CrossFireX⢠mode. See page 2-36 for details. ⢠Connect a chassis fan to t he motherboard connector labeled CHA_F AN1/2 when using multiple graphics cards for better thermal environment. See page 2-34 for details. VGA conîguration PCI Express operating mode PCIe x16_1 PCIe x16_2 Single VGA/PCIe card Installed with the bundled VGA switch card* x16 (Recommended for single VGA card) Single VGA/PCIe card N/A x8 (Recommended for single VGA card) Dual VGA/PCIe card x8 x8 * For working at x16 speed on the PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue), it is necessary to install the bundled VGA switch card to the PCIe 2.0 x16_1 slot (gray).
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-21 Chapter 2 2.6 Jumper Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5â10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! ⢠If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard batt ery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery . ⢠Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. ⢠Due to the chipset behavior , AC power of f is required to enable C.P .R. function. Y ou must turn off and on the power supply or unplug and plug the power cord before rebooting the system.
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.7 Onboard switches Onbo ard sw itches allow you to îne-tu ne per form ance w hen wor king o n a bar e or o pen-cas e syst em. This is id eal fo r ov ercloc kers an d game rs who contin ually c hange setting s to e nhance syst em per formanc e. 1. MemOK! switch Installing DIMMs that are incompaible with the motherboard may cause system boot failure, and the DRAM_LED near the MemOK! switch lights continuously . Press and hold the MemOK! switch until the DRAM_LED starts blinking to begin automatic memory compatibility tuning for successful boot. ⢠Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the DRAM_LED. ⢠The DRAM_LED also lights when the DIMM is not properly installed. T urn off the system and reinstall the DIMM before using the MemOK! function. ⢠The MemOK! switch does not function under Windows ® OS environment. ⢠During the tuning process, the system loads and tests failsafe memory settings. It takes about 30 seconds for the system to test one set of failsafe settings. If the test fails, the system reboots and test the next set of failsafe settings. The blinking speed of the DRAM_LED increases, indicating different test processes. ⢠Due to memory tuning requirement, the system automatically reboots when each timing set is tested. If the installed DIMMs still fail to boot after the whole tuning process, the DRAM_LED lights continuously . Replace the DIMMs with ones recommended in the Memory QVL (Qualiîed V endors Lists) in this user manual or on the ASUS website at www.asus.com. ⢠If you turn off the computer and replace DIMMs during the tuning process, the system continues memory tuning after turning on the computer . T o stop memory tuning, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord for about 5â10 seconds. ⢠If your system fail to boot due to BIOS overclocking, press the MemOK! switch to boot and load BIOS default settings. A messgae will appear during POST reminding you that the BIOS has been restored to its default settings. ⢠We recommend that you download and update to the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website at www .asus.com after using the MemOK! function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-23 Chapter 2 2. T urbo Key II switch This switch allows you to auto-tune your CPU to enhance the system performance. ⢠The O2LED5 LED near the T urbo Key II switch lights when the switch setting is turned to Enable . Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the O2LED5 LED. ⢠If you clear the CMOS or load the BIOS setup defaults, the related overclocking items in the BIOS menu follow the current setting of the T urbo Key II switch. ⢠If you change the switch setting to Enable under the OS environment, the T urbo Key II function will be activated after the next system bootup. ⢠Y ou may use the T urboV Auto Tuning, overclock in the BIOS setup program, and enable the T urbo Key II function at the same time. However, the system will use the last setting you have made. For ensuring the system performance, turn the switch setting to Enable when the system is powered off.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. Core Unlocker switch This switch allows you to unlock the extra cores of your CPU. For ensuring the system performance, turn the switch setting to Enable when the system is powered off. ⢠The O2LED4 LED near the Core Unlocker switch lights when the switch setting is turned to Enable . Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the O2LED4 LED. ⢠Y ou may also press <4> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) or enable the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu to activate the Core Unlocker function. ⢠The system will use the last setting you have made. ⢠If you clear the CMOS or load the BIOS setup defaults, the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu follows the current setting of the Core Unlocker switch.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-25 Chapter 2 2.8 Connectors 2.8.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 7. HDMI Out port*** 2. Optical S/PDIF Out port 8. DVI-D Out pot 3. D-Sub Out port 9. IEEE 1394a port 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 10. Power External SA T A port 5. LAN (RJ-45) port* 1 1. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 6. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6 12. Audio I/O ports** *and **: Refer to the tables on the next page for LAN port and audio port deînitions. ***: Refer to the notes and troubleshooting on HDTV overscaning or underscaling on the next pages. ⢠DO NOT insert a dif ferent connector to the external SA T A port. ⢠T o enable external SA T A device hot-plugging, you have to set the On Board A T A Controller item in the BIOS setting to [Enabled] and install the JMicron JMB36X Controller Driver from the support DVD.
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 ** Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out * LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port Activity Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection Dual display table This table indicates whether the dual display you want to use is supported or not. Dual display output Support Not support DVI D-Sub ⢠HDMI D-Sub ⢠DVI HDMI ⢠Playback of HD DVD and Blu-Ray Discs For better playback quality , we suggest that you follow the system requirements in the suggested list below . Suggested list CPU AMD ® Phenom II X4 955 DIMM DDR3 1333 BIOS setup Frame Buffer Size â 256MB or higher Playback software CyberLink ® PowerDVD 9 File format Best resolution Windows XP Windows V ista Windows 7 Non-protected clips 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p Blu-Ray 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-27 Chapter 2 T roubleshooting on HDTV overscaling or underscaling: If your desktop is extending beyond the viewable display area or the desktop or image is not îlling the entire display area while using the onboard HDMI out port and the HDMI cable, you can resize the desktop appearing on your HDTV screen. T o resize your HDTV desktop: 1. Install AMD Chipset Driver from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Right-click the desktop and select A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center . 3. From the Graphics Settings tree, expand DTV (HDMIâ¢) 1 . 4. Click Scaling Options . 5. Move the Underscan/Overscan slider to adjust the overall size of the display on the HDMI⢠DTV . Using this slider increases or decreases any black borders that may be visible around the outside of the display . The Scaling Options function of the DTV (HDMIâ¢) 1 item in the A TI CA T AL YST Control Center is adjustable only when you are using an HDTV compliance resolution such as 480i, 720i, or 1080i. 6. T o ensure that forcing a custom display mode through the A TI Displays Manager does not create conîicting resolutions, select the Use the scaling values instead of the customized settings when the desktop resolution does not match your DFP resolution check box. 6 5 4 3
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.2 Audio I/O connections Audio I/O ports Connect to Headphone and Mic Connect to Stereo / 2.1-channel Speakers
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-29 Chapter 2 Connect to 4.1 channel Speakers Connect to 7.1 channel Speakers Connect to 5.1 channel Speakers
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.3 Internal connectors Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE devices. If any device jumper is set as âCable-Selectâ, ensure that all other device jumpers have the same setting. 1. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîgure your device.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-31 Chapter 2 2. AMD ® SB850 Serial A T A Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors (7-pin SA T A 1-6) These connectors are for the Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives and optical disc drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 conîguration through the onboard AMD ® SB850 controller . ⢠These connectors are set to Native IDE mode by default. In Native IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the OnChip SA T A T ype item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details. ⢠Y ou must install Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later version before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature is available only if you are using Windows ® XP SP2 or later version. ⢠When using hot-plug and NCQ, set the OnChip SA T A T ype in the BIOS to [AHCI]. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 4. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) This conne ctor is for a n IEEE 1394a port. Conn ect th e IEEE 1394a module cable to this conn ector , the n insta ll the module to a slot op ening at the back o f the syst em cha ssis. Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! The IEEE 1394a module is purchased separately . 3. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The COM module is purchased separately .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-33 Chapter 2 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78; USB910; USB1 112; USB1314) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 13 94 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y ou can connect the front panel USB cable to the ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard if your chassis supports front panel USB ports. The USB module cable is purchased separately .
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 6. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN; 4-pin CHA_F AN1; 3-pin CHA_F AN2; 3-pin PWR_FAN) Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, ensuring that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufîcient air îow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ⢠The CPU_F AN connector supports the CPU fan of maximum 2A (24 W) fan power . ⢠Only the CPU_F AN, CHA_FAN1 and CHA_F AN2 connectors support the ASUS Fan Xpert feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_F AN1 or CHA_FAN2 for better thermal environment.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-35 Chapter 2 7. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) This connector is for an additional Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) port. Connect the S/PDIF Out m odule cable to t his connector , then install the modul e to a slot open ing at the back of the system chassis. The S/PDIF module is purchased separately . 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deînition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâs high-deînition audio capability . ⢠If you want to connect a high-deînition front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel T ype item in the BIOS setup to [HD]; if you want to connect an AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the item to [AC 97]. By default, this connector is set to [HD].
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 9. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR; 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ît these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îrmly until the connectors completely ît. ⢠For a fully conîgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V Speciîcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 450 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin EA TX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠We recommend that you use a PSU with higher power output when conîguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠If you are uncertain about the minimum power supply requirement for your system, refer to the Recommended Power Supply W attage Calculator at http://support. asus.com/PowerSupplyCalculator/PSCalculator .aspx?SLanguage=en-us for details. ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 1000W power or above to ensure the system stability .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-37 Chapter 2 ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-of f mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 10. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions.
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.4. ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) Use the ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect the chassis front panel cables. T o install the ASUS Q-Connector: 1. Connect the front panel cables to the ASUS Q-Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector to know the detailed pin deînitions, and then match them to their respective front panel cable labels. The labels on the front panel cables may vary depending on the chassis model. 2. Install the ASUS Q-Connector to the system panel connector , ensuring the orientation matches the labels on the motherboard. 3. The front panel functions are now enabled. The îgure sho ws the Q-Conn ector is prop erly installed on the motherboard. IDE_LED POWER SW RESET SW IDE_LED- IDE_LED PWR Reset Ground Ground
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-39 Chapter 2 2.9 Onboard LEDs 1. Standby Power LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2. DRAM LED DRAM LED checks the DRAM in sequence during motherboard booting process. If an error is found , the LED next to the error device will continue lighting until the problem is solved. This user-friendly design provides an intuitional way to locate the root problem within a second. Y ou may disable the DRAM LED in BIOS. Refer to section 3.9 T ools menu for details.
2-40 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. T urbo Key II LED The T urbo Key II LED lights when the T urbo Key II switch is turned to Enable . 4. Core Unlocker LED The Core Unlocker LED lights when the Core Unclocker switch is turned to Enable . The Core Unlocker LED keeps on lighting even though the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu is set to [Disabled].
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-41 Chapter 2 2.10 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with the âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or change from orange to green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see the BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 3. BIOS Beep Description One short beep VGA detected Quick boot set to disabled No keyboard detected One continuous beep followed by two short beeps then a pause (repeated) No memory detected One continuous beep followed by three short beeps No VGA detected One continuous beep followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure 2.11 Turning off the computer While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seco nds puts the system on sleep mode or soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section 3.7 Power menu in Chapter 3 for details.
2-42 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-1 Chapter 3 3.1 Knowing BIOS BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings such as storage device conîguration, overclocking settings, advanced power management, and boot device conîguration that are needed for system startup in the motherboard CMOS. In normal circumstances, the default BIOS settings apply to most conditions to ensure optimum performance. We recommend that you not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances: ⢠An error message appears on the screen during the system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. ⢠Y ou have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or update. 3.2 Updating BIOS The ASUS website publishes the latest BIOS versions to provide enhancements on system stability , compatibility , or performance. However , BIOS updating is potentially risky . If there is no problem using the current version of BIOS, DO NOT manually update the BIOS. Inappropriate BIOS updating may result in the systemâs failure to boot. Carefully follow the instructions of this chapter to update your BIOS if necessary . Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île for this motherboard. The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard BIOS setup program. 1. ASUS Update: Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment. 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2: Updates the BIOS using a USB îash drive. 3. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility: Restores the BIOS using the motherboard support DVD or a USB îash drive when the BIOS île fails or gets corrupted. 4. ASUS BIOS Updater: Updates and backups the BIOS in DOS environment using the motherboard support DVD and a USB îash disk drive. Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS île to a USB îash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update utility . Inappropriate settings of the BIOS may result to instability or failure to boot. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel . Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3
3-2 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.2.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS île ⢠Download the latest BIOS île from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS île ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet ⢠View the BIOS version information This utility is available in the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support DVD in the optical drive. 2. From the Main menu, click the Ut ilities tab, then c lick Insta ll ASUS U pdat e VX.X X.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. From the Windows ® desktop, click Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet from the drop-down menu, and then click Next.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-3 Chapter 3 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîc, or click Auto Select . Click Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next . Updating the BIOS through a BIOS île T o update the BIOS through a BIOS île: 1. Fom the Windows ® desktop, click Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a île from the dropdown menu, then click Next . M4A89GTD M4A89GTD.ROM Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS île from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update process.
3-4 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to use a bootable îoppy disk or an OS-based utility . Before you start using this utility , download the latest BIOS from the ASUS website at www .asus.com. T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Insert the USB îash disk that contains the latest BIOS île to the USB port, and then launch EZ Flash 2 in any of these two ways: ⢠Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ⢠Enter the BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash 2 and press <Enter> to enable it. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V4.12 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown 2. Press <T ab> to switch between drives until the correct BIOS île is found. When the correct BIOS île is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-5 Chapter 3 3.2.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS île when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can restore a corrupted BIOS île using the motherboard support DVD or a USB îash drive that contains the BIOS île. The BIOS île in the motherboard support DVD may be older than the BIOS île published on the ASUS ofîcial website. If you want to use the newer BIOS île, download the île at support.asus.com and save it to a USB îash drive. Recovering the BIOS T o recover the BIOS: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support DVD to the optical drive, or the USB îash drive containing the BIOS île to the USB port. 3. The utility automatically checks the devices for the BIOS île. When found, the utility reads the BIOS île and starts îashing the corrupted BIOS île. 4. Turn of f the system after the utility completes the updating process and power on again. 5. The system requires you to enter BIOS Setup to recover BIOS setting. T o ensure system compatibility and stability , we recommend that you press <F2> to load default BIOS values. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
3-6 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Booting the system in DOS environment 1. Insert the USB îash drive with the latest BIOS île and BIOS Updater to the USB port. 2. Boot your computer . When the ASUS Logo appears, press <F8> to show the BIOS Boot Device Select Menu . Insert the support DVD into the optical drive and select the optical drive as the boot device. Welcome to FreeDOS (http://www.freedos.org)! C:\>d: D:\> 3. When the Make Disk menu appears, select the FreeDOS command prompt item by pressing the item number . 4. At the FreeDOS prompt, type d: and press <Enter> to switch the disk from Drive C (optical drive) to Drive D (USB îash drive). Please select boot device: â and â to move selection ENTER to select boot device ESC to boot using defaults SATA:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CDROM:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX USB:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Network:XXXXXXXXXXXXX 3.2.4 ASUS BIOS Updater The ASUS BIOS Updater allows you to update BIOS in DOS environment. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS île that you can use as a backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. The succeeding utility screens are for reference only . The actual utility screen displays may not be same as shown. Before updating BIOS 1. Prepare the motherboard support DVD and a USB îash drive in F A T32/16 format and single partition. 2. Download the latest BIOS île and BIOS Updater from the ASUS website at http:// support.asus.com and save them on the USB îash drive. ⢠NTFS is not supported under DOS environment. Do not save the BIOS île and BIOS Updater to a hard disk drive or USB îash drive in NTFS format. ⢠Do not save the BIOS île to a îoppy disk due to low disk capacity . 3. Turn of f the computer and disconnect all SA T A hard disk drives (optional).
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-7 Chapter 3 2. The BIOS Updater backup screen appears indicating the BIOS backup process. When BIOS backup is done, press any key to return to the DOS prompt. ASUSTek BIOS Updater for DOS V1.00b [09/06/22] Current ROM Update ROM Note Saving BIOS: FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown BIOS backup is done! Press any key to continue. D:\>bupdater /oOLDBIOS1.rom Filename Extension Backing up the current BIOS T o backup the current BIOS île using the BIOS Updater Ensure that the USB îash drive is not write-protected and has enough free space to save the île. 1. At the FreeDOS prompt, type bupdater /o[î¿lename] and press <Enter>. The [îlename] is any user-assigned îlename with no more than eight alphanumeric characters for the îlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension.
3-8 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 4. Select Y es and press <Enter>. When BIOS update is done, press <ESC> to exit BIOS Updater . Restart your computer . DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠For BIOS Updater version 1.04 or later , the utility automatically exits to the DOS prompt after updating BIOS. ⢠Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit BIOS menu. See Chaper 3 of your motherboard user manual for details. ⢠Ensure to connect all SA T A hard disk drives after updating the BIOS île if you have disconnected them. Updating the BIOS île T o update the BIOS île using BIOS Updater 1. At the FreeDOS prompt, type bupdater /pc /g and press <Enter>. ASUSTek BIOS Updater for DOS V1.00b [09/06/22] Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit M4A89GTD.ROM 2097152 2010-01-11 17:30:48 FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown D:\>bupdater /pc /g 2. The BIOS Updater screen appears as below . 3. Press <T ab> to switch between screen îelds and use the <Up/Down/Home/End> keys to select the BIOS île and press <Enter>. BIOS Updater checks the selected BIOS île and prompts you to conîrm BIOS update. Are you sure to update BIOS? Yes No
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-9 Chapter 3 3.3 BIOS setup program A BIOS Setup program is provided for BIOS item modiîcation. When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility . Otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If y ou wis h to e nter Se tup af ter PO ST , r estart the sy stem b y press ing <C trl> <A lt> <Del ete>, or b y pres sing th e rese t butto n on t he sys tem chassi s. Y ou c an a lso re start b y turn ing the syst em of f and then b ack on. Do th is last optio n only if the îrst t wo fai led. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various submenus and select from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS setting, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details. ⢠If the system fails to boot after changing any BIOS setting, try to clear the CMOS and reset the motherboard to the default value. See section 2.6 Jumper for details. 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen 3.3.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîguration Ai T weaker For changing the overclocking settings Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîguration Boot For changing the system boot conîguration T ools For conîguring options for special functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys General help Menu bar Submenu items Conîguration îelds Menu items System Time [13:51:25] System Date [Mon 01/11/2010] Language [English] SATA1 [HD T722 516D LA380 ] SATA2 [Not Detected] SATA3 [ATAPI DVD DH1] SATA4 [Not Detected] SATA5 [Not Detected] SATA6 [Not Detected] Storage Conî¿guration System Information
3-10 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.3.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. The navigation keys may differ from one screen to another . 3.3.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Ai T weaker, Advanced, Power , Boot, T ools, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 3.3.5 Submenu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a submenu. T o display the submenu, select the item and press <Enter>. 3.3.6 Conîguration îelds These îelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conîgurable, you can change the value of the îeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîgurable. A conîgurable îeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îeld, select it and press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 3.3.7 Pop-up window . 3.3.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item and press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîguration options for that item. 3.3.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ît on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 3.3.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] ACPI Version Features [Disabled] ACPI APIC support [ Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. Scroll bar Disabled Enabled Pop-up window
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-1 1 Chapter 3 3.4 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the submenu. Refer to section 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. 3.4.1 SA T A 1â6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of SA T A devices. There is a separate submenu for each SA T A device. Select a device item and press <Enter> to display the SA T A device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART Monitoring). These values are not user-conîgurable. These items show N/A if no SA T A device is installed in the system. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [13:51:25] System Date [Mon 01/11/2010] Language [English] SATA1 [HD T722 516D LA380 ] SATA2 [Not Detected] SATA3 [ATAPI DVD DH1] SATA4 [Not Detected] SATA5 [Not Detected] SATA6 [Not Detected] Storage Conî¿guration System Information v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Select the type of device connected to the system. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : HDT722516DLA380 Size : 164.7GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-6 SMART Monitoring:Supported LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]
3-12 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 T ype [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device installed. [Not Installed] Select this option if no device is installed. [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the appropriate device type. [CDROM] Select this option if you are speciîcally conîguring a CD-ROM drive. [ARMD] Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. This item appears in SA T A 5/SA T A 6 only . LBA/Large Mode [Auto] [Auto] Select [Auto] to enable the LBA mode (Logical Block Addressing mode) if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. [Disabled] Disables this function. Block (Multi-Sector T ransfer) M [Auto] [Auto] When se t to [A uto], the dat a transfer fr om and to the device occur s in multipl e sectors at a time if the device suppo rts multi-sec tor transfer feature. [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. PIO Mode [Auto] [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the PIO (Programmed input/output) modes, which correspond to different data transfer rates. [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] Sets the PIO mode to Mode 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. DMA Mode [Auto] DMA (Direct Memory Access) allows your computer to transfer data to and from the hardware devices installed with much less CPU overhead. The DMA mode consists of SDMA (single-word DMA), MDMA (multi-word DMA), and UDMA (Ultra DMA). Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the DMA mode. SMART Monitoring [Auto] [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the S.M.A.R.T (Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology). [Enabled] Enables the S.M.A.R.T feature. [Disabled] Disables the S.M.A.R.T feature. 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] [Enabled] Sets the controller to combine two 16-bit reads from the hard disk into a single 32-bit double word transfer to the processor . This makes more efîcient use of the PCI bus as fewer transactions are needed for the transfer of a particular amount of data. [Disabled] Disables this function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-13 Chapter 3 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration The Storage Conîguration menu allows you to conîgure your storage devices. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. OnChip SA T A Channel [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard channel SA T A port. [Disabled] Disables the onboard channel SA T A port. The following two items appear only when you set the OnChip SA T A Channel item to [Enabled]. OnChip SA T A T ype [Native IDE] Allows you to set the SA T A conîguration. [Native IDE] Set to [Native IDE] when you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices. [RAID] Set to [RAID] when you want to create a RAID conîguration from the SA T A hard disk drives. [AHCI] Set to [AHCI] when you want the SA T A hard disk drives to use the AHCI (Advanced Host Controller Interface). The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. ⢠When this item is set to [AHCI], the information of the SA T A connectors 1â6 can be seen only under the OS environment or during POST . ⢠For Windows ® XP OS, you have to install the AHCI driver , so that you could use the SA T A connectors 1â6 in AHCI mode under the OS environment. SA T A Port5 - Port6 [Native IDE] Setting this item to [Native IDE] instead of [RAID] or [AHCI] allows the system to recognize the optical dirves connected to the SA T A connectors 5 or 6 when installing OS. If you use a SA T A optical drive to run the OS installation disk, we strongly recommend that you install the optical dirve to the SA T A connectors 5/6 and set them to [Native IDE] mode. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Storage Conî¿guration OnChip SATA Channel [Enabled] OnChip SATA Type [Native IDE] SATA Port5 - Port6 [Native IDE]
3-14 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.4.3 System Information This menu gives y ou an overvie w of t he gen eral syste m speci îcatio ns. T he BIO S au tomati cally dete cts th e BIOS inform ation, CPU sp eciîca tion , and system memory in thi s menu . BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main EC BIOS Version : MBEC-0007 BIOS Information Version : 0109 Build Date: 01/07/10 Processor Type : AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 945 Processor Speed : 3010MHz System Memory Usable Size : 768MB
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-15 Chapter 3 3.5 Ai Tweaker menu The Ai T weaker menu items allow you to conîgure overclocking-related items. Be cautious when changing the settings of the Ai T weaker menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. The conîguration options for this chapter vary depending on the CPU and DIMM model you installed on the motherboard. Scroll down to display the following items: v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Warning: this function belongs to overclock- ing, and it may cause instability. Select a CPU level, and the rest will be auto-adjusted. If you want to adjust more, set Ai Overclock Tuner to Manual after you select a CPU level. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure System Performance Settings CPU Level UP [Auto] ------------------------------------------------- OC Tuner Utility Ai Overclock Tuner [Auto] CPU Ratio [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] CPU/NB Frequency [Auto] HT Link Speed [Auto] DRAM Timing Conî¿guration DRAM Driving Conî¿guration ******* Please key in numbers directly! ******* CPU & NB Voltage Mode [Offset] CPU Offset Voltage 1.308 [Auto] CPU/NB Offset Voltage 1.100 [Auto] CPU VDDA Voltage 2.490 [Auto] DRAM Voltage 1.500 [Auto] HT Voltage 1.196 [Auto] NB Voltage 1.093 [Auto] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. NB 1.8V Voltage 1.950 [Auto] SB Voltage 1.100 [Auto] SidePort Memory Voltage 1.500 [Auto] *********************************************** CPU Load-Line Calibration [Auto] CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration [Auto] CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] ************** GFX Overclocking *************** Internal Graphics Mode [UMA SIDEPORT] UMA Frame Buffer Size [Auto] SIDEPORT Clock Speed [DDR3-1333MHz] GFX Engine Clock Override [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 3.5.1 CPU Level UP [Auto] Allows you to select a CPU level, and the related parameters will be automatically adjusted according to the selected CPU level. If you want to manually conîgure the settings in detail, set Ai Overclock T uner to [Manual] after selecting a CPU level. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Phenom II-955] [Phenom II-3.4G] [Phenom II-3.6G] ⢠The conîguration options vary depending on the CPU model you install on the motherboard. ⢠The CPU Level UP function support depends on CPU types.
3-16 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 The conîguration options for the following sub-items vary depending on the CPU/DIMMs you install on the motherboard. OC From CPU Level UP [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock Tuner item to [Manual] and allows you to select a CPU level. The related parameters will be automatically adjusted according to the selected CPU level. CPU Bus Frequency [XXX] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU Bus frequency . Y ou can also key in the desired frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 600. PCIE Frequency [XXX] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the PCIE frequency . Y ou can also key in the desired value using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 150. DRAM O.C. Proîle [DDR3-1600MHz] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [D.O.C.P .] and allows you to select a DRAM O.C. proîle, which applies different settings to DRAM frequency , DRAM timing and DRAM voltage. Conîguration options: [DDR3-1600MHz] [DDR3-1800MHz] [DDR3-1866MHz] Proîle Info : xxxxMHzâx-x-x-xx This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [D.O.C.P .] and displays the current DRAM proîle information. The proîle information varies according to the DRAM O.C. Proîle youâve selected. 3.5.3 Ai Overclock T uner [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency . Select any of these preset overclocking conîguration options: Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. D.O.C.P Allows you to select a DRAM O.C. proîle, and the related parameters will be adjusted automatically . CPU Level UP Allows you to select a CPU level, and the related parameters will be adjusted automatically . 3.5.2 OC T uner Utility OC T uner utility automatically overclocks the frequency and voltage of the CPU and DRAM. Press <Enter> to start auto tuning. It takes around îve minutes, and the system will reboot for several times until auto tuning is completed.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-17 Chapter 3 3.5.4 CPU Ratio [Auto] Allows you to set the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the ratio. The valid value ranges vary according to your CPU model. 3.5.5 DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR3 operating frequency . The conîguration options vary with the CPU Bus Frequency item settings. Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. 3.5.6 CPU/NB Frequency [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU/NB frequency . Conîguration options: [Auto] [800MHz] [1000MHz] [1200MHz] [1400MHz] [1600MHz] [1800MHz] [2000MHz] 3.5.7 HT Link Speed [Auto] Allows you to select the HyperT ransport link speed. Conîguration options: [Auto] [200MHz] [400MHz] [600MHz] [800MHz] [1000MHz] [1200MHz] [1400MHz] [1600MHz] [1800MHz] [2000MHz] 3.5.8 DRAM Timing Conîguration The conîguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. DRAM CAS# Latency [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# PRE Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# ACT Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [15 CLK] â [30 CLK] DRAM READ to PRE Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM Row Cycle Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1 1 CLK] â [41 CLK]
3-18 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 DRAM WRITE Recovery Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] [8 CLK] [10 CLK] [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# to RAS# Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM READ to WRITE Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [17 CLK] DRAM WRITE to READ Delay(DD) [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [2 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM WRITE to READ Delay(SD) [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM WRITE to WRITE Timing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM READ to READ Timing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM REF Cycle Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [90ns] [1 10ns] [160ns] [300ns] [350ns] DRAM Refresh Rate [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Every 7.8ms] [Every 3.9ms] DRAM Command Rate [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1T] [2T] 3.5.9 DRAM Driving Conîguration The conîguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. CKE drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] CS/ODT drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] ADDR/CMD drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] MEMCLK drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x]
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-19 Chapter 3 Data drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] DQS drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] Processor ODT [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [240 ohms /- 20%] [120 ohms /- 20%] [60 ohms /- 20%] Some of the following items are adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . 3.5.10 CPU & NB V oltage Mode [Offset] Allows you to set the CPU & CPU/NB V oltage Mode. Different sub-items appear according to the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item setting. Conîguration options: [Offset] [Manual] CPU Offset V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Offset] and allows you to set the CPU Offset voltage. The values range from 0.003125V to 0.700000V with a 0.003125V interval. CPU/NB Offset V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Offset] and allows you to set the CPU/NB Offset voltage. The values range from 0.003125 V to 0.700000V with a 0.003125V interval. CPU V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Manual] and allows you to set a îxed CPU voltage. CPU/NB V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Manual] and allows you to set a îxed CPU/NB voltage. 3.5.1 1 CPU VDDA V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU VDDA voltage. The values range from 2.20000V to 2.90000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.12 DRAM V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM voltage. The values range from 1.20000V to 2.50000V with a 0.00625V interval.
3-20 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.5.18 CPU Load-Line Calibration [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU Load-Line mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3.5.19 CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU/NB Load-Line mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3.5.20 CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] [Auto] Automatic conîguration. [Disabled] Enhances the CPU overclocking ability . [Enabled] Sets to [Enabled] for EMI control. 3.5.21 PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] [Auto] Automatic conîguration. [Disabled] Enhances the PCIE overclocking ability . [Enabled] Sets to [Enabled] for EMI control. 3.5.13 HT V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the HyperT ransport voltage. The values range from 0.80000V to 1.40000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.14 NB V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Northbridge voltage. The values range from 0.80000V to 2.00000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.15 NB 1.8V V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Northbridge 1.8V voltage. The values range from 1.80V to 2.10V with a 0.05V interval. 3.5.16 SB V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Southbridge voltage. The values range from 1.10V to 1.40V with a 0.05V interval. 3.5.17 SidePort Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the SidePort memory voltage. The values range from 1.50V to 1.80V with a 0.10V interval. ⢠Setting the above voltages to a high level may damage the CPU, memory module, and chipset permanently . Proceed with caution. ⢠The system may require a better cooling system to work stably under high voltage settings.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-21 Chapter 3 3.5.22 Internal Graphics Mode [UMA SIDEPORT] Allows you to select the Internal Graphics Mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [UMA] [SIDEPORT] [UMA SIDEPOR T] UMA Frame Buffer Size [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA] or [UMA SIDEPORT]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [32MB] [64MB] [128MB] [256MB] [512MB] SIDEPORT Clock Speed [DDR3-1333MHz] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [SIDEPORT] or [UMA SIDEPORT]. Be cautious when setting the SIDEPOR T clock speed. Improper overclock setting may cause the system unstable or hardware damage. 3.5.23 GFX Engine Clock Override [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the GFX Engine Clock Override function. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] GFX Engine Clock [500] This item appears only when you set the GFX Engine Clock Override item to [Enabled] and allows you to set the GFX Engine Clock. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value, or key in the desired value using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key .
3-22 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Be cautious when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. 3.6 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Conî¿gure CPU. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration USB Conî¿guration PCIPnP 3.6.1 CPU Conîguration The items in this menu show th e CPU- relate d in format ion tha t the BIOS au tomati cally d etects . The items shown in this screen may be different due to the CPU you installed. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced CPU Conî¿guration AGESA Version:3.5.4.0 AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 945 Processor Revision: C2 Cache L1: 512KB Cache L2: 2048KB Cache L3: 6MB Speed : 3010MHz, NB Clk: 2000MHz uCode Patch Level : 0x1000086 Microcode Updation [Enabled] Secure Virtual Machine Mode [Enabled] CoolânâQuiet [Enabled] ASUS Core Unlocker [Disabled] C1E Support [Enabled] Options Enabled Disabled Microcode Updation [Enabled] [Enabled] Allows the system to update the Microcode automatically , enhancing system performance. [Disabled] Disables this function. Secure Virtual Machine Mode [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the AMD Secure Virtual Machine mode. [Disabled] Disables this function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-23 Chapter 3 CoolânâQuiet [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the AMD CoolânâQuiet function. [Disabled] Disables this function. ASUS Core Unlocker [Disabled] [Enabled] Enables the ASUS Core Unlocker to get the full computing power of the processor . [Disabled] Disables this function. C1E Support [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the C1E support function. This item should be enabled in order to enable the Enhanced Halt Sate. [Disabled] Disables this function. NorthBridge Chipset Conîguration 3.6.2 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced Chipset Settings NorthBridge Conî¿guration 890GX Conî¿guration Options for NB BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced NorthBridge Chipset Conî¿guration DRAM Controller Conî¿guration ECC Conî¿guration DRAM Controller Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced DRAM Controller Conî¿guration Channel Interleaving [XOR of Address bit] MemClk Tristate C3/ATLVID [Disabled] Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] DCT Unganged Mode [Always] Power Down Enable [Disabled] Channel Interleaving [XOR of Address bit] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Address bits 6] [Address bits 12] [XOR of Address bits [20:16, 6]] [XOR of Address bits [20:16, 9]] MemClk T ristate C3/A TL VID [Disabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enable Channel Memory Interleaving
3-24 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 ECC Conîguration ECC Mode [Disabled] Disables or sets the DRAM ECC mode that allows the hardware to report and correct memory errors. [Disabled] Disables the DRAM ECC mode. [Basic] Set to [Basic] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [Good] Set to [Good] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [Super] Set to [Super] to adjust the DRAM BG Scrub sub-item manually . [Max] Set to [Max] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [User] Set to [User] to adjust all the subitems manually . Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DCT Unganged Mode [Always] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Always] Power Down Enable [Disabled] Enables or disables the DDR power down mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power Down Mode [Channel] This item appears only when you enable the previous item and allows you to set the DDR power down mode. Conîguration options: [Channel] [Chip Select] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ECC Conî¿guration ECC Mode [Disabled] DRAM ECC Enable [Disabled] DRAM SCRUB REDIRECT [Disabled] 4-Bit ECC Mode [Disabled] DRAM BG Scrub [Disabled] Data Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] L2 Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] L3 Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] Set the level of ECC protection. Note: The âSuperâ ECC mode dynamically sets the DRAM scrub rate so all of memory is scrubbed in 8 hours.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-25 Chapter 3 890GX Chipset Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 890GX Chipset Conî¿guration Internal Graphics Conî¿guration Primary Video Controller [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] Internal Graphics Conf UMA-SP Interleave Mode [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA SIDEPORT]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Coarse] [Fine] The following îve items appear only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [SIDEPORT] or [UMA SIDEPOR T]. SP Power Management [Dynamic CMD] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Dynamic CKE] [Dynamic CMD] [Dynamic CLK] [Disable] SP NB T ermination [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP Memory T ermination [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP CMD Hold [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP DA T A Hold [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] Surround View [Auto] If you set the PCI Express device as the primary display and enable this item, you may use the internal graphics as the secondary display . This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA], [SIDEPORT], or [UMA SIDEPOR T]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Enabled] [Disabled] When set to [Auto], only the primary display could be activated. Internal Graphics Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Internal Graphics Conî¿guration UMA-SP Interleave Mode [Auto] SP Power Management [Dynamic CMD] SP NB Termination [Auto] SP Memory Termination [Auto] SP CMD Holde [Auto] SP DATA Hold [Auto] Surround View [Auto] FB Location [Above 4G] AMD 880 HD Audio [Enable] Auto - Fine interleave Ratio/Size selected based on system conî¿guration (HT Freq, number of memory channel).
3-26 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 FB Location [Above 4G] Allows you to select the FB Location. Conîguration options: [Below 4G] [Above 4G] AMD 880 HD Audio [Enabled] Allows you to disable or enable the AMD 880 HD Audio. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Primary Video Controller [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] Allows you to select the graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. Conîguration options: [GFX0-GPP-IGFX-PCI] [GPP-GFX0-IGFX-PCI] [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] [IGFX-GFX0-GPP-PCI] 3.6.3 Onboard Devices Conîguration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conîguration options: [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port1 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 mode. Conîguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] Onboard LAN [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard LAN controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Enabled]. [Enabled] Enables the onboard Gigabit LAN Boot ROM. [Disabled] Disables the LAN Boot ROM. Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard IEEE 1394a controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . Onboard Devices Conî¿guration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Mode [Normal] Onboard LAN [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Azalia Device [Enabled] Front Panel Type [HD] SPDIF OUT Type [SPDIF] On Board ATA Controller [Enabled] On Board ATA Controller ROM [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to select Serial Port1 Base Addresses.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-27 Chapter 3 HD Audio Azalia Device [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the HD Audio controller . Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] The following three items appear only when you set the HD Audio Azalia Device item to [Enabled] or [Auto]. Front Panel T ype [HD] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâ97 or high- deînition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. [AC 97] Sets the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâ97 [HD] Sets the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to high deînition audio. SPDIF OUT T ype [SPDIF] If your graphics card has HDMI output and needs to use SPDIF signal from the SPDIF_Out header , you need to set to HDMI for HDMI audio output. [SPDIF] Sets to [SPDIF Output] for SPDIF audio output. [HDMI] Sets to [HDMI Output] for HDMI audio output. On Board A T A Controller [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard A T A controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . On Board A T A Controller ROM [Enabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Enabled]. [Enabled] Enables the onboard A T A controller ROM. [Disabled] Disables the onboard A T A controller ROM. 3.6.4 USB Conîguration The items in this menu allow you to change the USB-related features. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.5-13.4 USB Devices Enabled: 2 Hubs USB Support [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced The USB Devices Enabled item shows the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None.
3-28 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.6.5 PCIPnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. Plug And Play O/S [No] [Y es] W hen se t to [Y es] and if yo u insta ll a P lug and Play operati ng sys tem, t he oper ating system conîgu res the Plug and Pl ay d evices not re quired for bo ot. [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîgures all the devices in the system. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Support [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the USB Host Controllers. [Disabled] Disables the controllers. The following items appear only when you set USB Support to [Enabled]. Legacy USB Support [Auto] [Auto] Allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. [Enabled] Enables the support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). [Disabled] Disables the function. USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] [FullSpeed] Sets the USB 2.0 controller mode to FullSpeed (12 Mbps). [HiSpeed] Sets the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps). BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] [Ena bled] En ables the sup port f or oper ating system s wi thout an EHCI hand- of f feat ure. [Disabled] Disables the function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-29 Chapter 3 3.7 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. 3.7.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. [Auto] The system automatically conîgures the ACPI suspend mode. [S1 (POS) only] Sets the ACPI suspend mode to S1/POS (Power On Suspend). [S3 only] Sets the ACPI suspend mode to S3/STR (Suspend T o RAM). 3.7.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. [No] The system will not invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. [Y es] The system invokes VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. 3.7.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] [Disabled] The system will not add additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciîcations. [Enabled] The system adds additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciîcations. 3.7.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] [Disabled] The system disables the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). [Enabled] The ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor
3-30 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 EuP Ready [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Energy Using Products (EuP) Ready function. [Enabled] Allows BIOS to switch off some power at S5 state to get system ready for the EuP requirement. When set to [Enabled], power for WOL, WO_USB, audio and onboard LEDs will be switched off at S5 state. Restore On AC Power Loss [Disabled] [Power On] The system goes into on state after an AC power loss. [Disabled] The system goes into off state after an AC power loss. [Last State] The system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Power On By PCI/PCIE Device [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI/PCIE devices. [Enabled] Allows you to turn on the system through a PCI/PCIE LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Power On By PS/2 Devoces [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Power On by a PS/2 devices. [Enabled] Enables the Power On by a PS/2 devices. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Power On By Ring [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables to power up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. [Enabled] The computer could be powered up when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îrst try . Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables RTC to generate a wake event. [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date (Days) and System Time will become user-conîgurable with set values. 3.7.5 APM Conîguration APM Conî¿guration EuP Ready [Disabled] Restore on AC Power Loss [Disabled] Power On By PCI/PCIE Device [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Devices [Disabled] Power On By Ring [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-31 Chapter 3 3.7.6 Hardware Monitor CPU T emperature(PECI) / MB T emperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU and motherboard temperatures. Select Ignored if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Chassis Fan / Chassis Fan 2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, chassis, and power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îeld shows N/A . Select Ignored if you do not wish to display the detected speed. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select Ignored if you do not want to detect this item. CPU Q-Fan Function [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables the CPU Q-Fan control feature. [Enabled] Enables the CPU Q-Fan control feature. The following two items appear only when you set CPU Q-Fan Function to [Enabled]. CPU Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] A warning message will appear to remind you that the CPU fan speed is lower than the selected value. Conîguration options: [500RPM] [400RPM] [300RPM] [200RPM] [100RPM] [Ignored] Select Fan T ype: [PWR Fan] [PWR Fan] Sets to [PWR Fan] when using a 4-pin CPU fan. [DC Fan] Sets to [DC Fan] when using a 3-pin CPU fan. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power CPU Temperature ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [35ºC/95ºF] MB Temperature [34ºC/93ºF] CPU Fan Speed [3590RPM] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.040V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.008V] 5V Voltage [ 4.776V] 12V Voltage [11.648V] CPU Q-Fan Function [Enabled] CPU Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] Select Fan Type : [PWR Fan] CPU Q-Fan Mode [Optimal] Chassis Q-Fan Function [Disabled]
3-32 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 CPU Q-Fan Mode [Optimal] [Performance] Sets to [Performance] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. [Optimal] Sets to [Optimal] to make the CPU fan automatically adjust depending on the CPU temperature. [Silent] Sets to [Silent] to minimize the fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation.] [Manual] Sets to [Manual] to assign detailed fan speed control parameters. The following four items appear only when you set CPU Q-Fan Mode to [Manual]. CPU Upper T emperature [70ºC/158ºF] Sets the upper limit of the CPU temperature. Conîguration options: [30ºC/86ºF] [40ºC/104ºF] [50ºC/122ºF] [60ºC/140ºF] [70ºC/158ºF] [80ºC/176ºF] [90ºC/194ºF] CPU Fan Max. Duty Cycle [100%] Sets the maximum CPU fan duty cycle. When the CPU temperature reaches the upper limit, the CPU fan will operate at the maximum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] CPU Lower T emperature [20ºC/68ºF] Displays the lower limit of the CPU temperature. CPU Fan Min. Duty Cycle [20%] Sets the minimum CPU fan duty cycle. When the CPU temperature is under 20ºC/68ºF , the CPU fan will operate at the minimum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [00%] [10%] [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] Chassis Q-Fan Mode [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Chassis Q-Fan control feature. [Enabled] Enables the Chassis Q-Fan control feature. The following item appears only when you set Chassis Q-Fan Mode to [Enabled]. Chassis Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] A warning message will appear to remind you that the chassis fan speed is lower than the selected value. Conîguration options: [500RPM] [400RPM] [300RPM] [200RPM] [100RPM] [Ignored] Chassis Q-Fan Mode [Silent] [Performance] Sets to [Performance] to achieve maximum chassis fan speed. [Optimal] Sets to [Optimal] to make the chassis fan automatically adjust depending on the chassis temperature. [Silent] Sets to [Silent] to minimize fan speed for quiet chassis fan operation. [Manual] Sets to [Manual] to assign detailed fan speed control parameters.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-33 Chapter 3 3.8 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. 3.8.1 Boot Device Priority v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Speciî¿es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. A virtual îoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable Dev.] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot The following four items appear only when you set Chassi Q-Fan Mode to [Manual]. Upper T emperature [70ºC/158ºF] Sets the upper limit of the system temperature. Conîguration options: [30/86ºF] [40ºC/104ºF] [50ºC/122ºF] [60ºC/140ºF] [70ºC/158ºF] [80ºC/176ºF] [90ºC/194ºF] Chassis Fan Max. Duty Cycle [100%] Sets the maximum chassis fan duty cycle. When the system temperature reaches the upper limit, the chassis fan will operate at the maximum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] Lower T emperature [20ºC/68ºF] Displays the lower limit of the system temperature. Chassis Fan Min. Duty Cycle [20%] Sets the minimum chassis fan duty cycle. When the system temperature is under 20ºC/68ºF , the chassis fan will operate at the minimum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [00%] [10%] [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%]
3-34 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 1st â xxth Boot Device [Removable Dev .] Thes e item s speci fy the boot d evice priori ty s equenc e from the av ailable devic es. T he num ber of d evice items t hat ap pears o n the screen dep ends o n the n umber of devi ces in stalled in th e syst em. Co nîgurat ion op tions: [Remov able D ev .] [ Hard D rive ] [A T API CD -ROM] [Disabl ed] ⢠T o selec t the b oot dev ice during syst em start up, pre ss <F8> whe n ASUS Lo go a ppears. ⢠T o access Windows OS in Safe Mode, do any of the following: - Press <F5> when ASUS Logo appears. - Press <F8> after POST . 3.8.2 Boot Settings Conîguration Quick Boot [Enabled] [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], BIOS skips some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. Full Screen Logo [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the full screen logo display feature. [Disabled] Disables the full screen logo display feature. Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo 2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] [Force BIOS] The third-party ROM messages will be forced to display during the boot sequence. [Keep Current] The third-party ROM messages will be displayed only if the third-party manufacturer had set the add-on device to do so. Bootup Num-Lock [On] [Off] Sets the power-on state of the NumLock to [Off]. [On] Sets the power-on state of the NumLock to [On]. W ait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables this function. [Enabled] The system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables this function. [Enabled] The system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-35 Chapter 3 3.8.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, key in a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message Password Installed appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message Password Uninstalled appears. If you have forgotten your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 2.6 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Passward BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. [No Access] Prevents user access to the Setup utility . [View Only] Allows access but does not allow change to any îeld. [Limited] Allows changes only to selected îelds, such as Date and T ime. [Full Access] Allows viewing and changing all the îelds in the Setup utility .
3-36 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message Password Installed appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] [Setup] BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . [Always] BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-37 Chapter 3 3.9 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit ASUS EZ Flash 2 Express Gate [Auto] Enter OS Timer [10 Seconds] Reset User Data [No] ASUS O.C. Proî¿le AI NET 2 POST State LEDs [Enabled] 3.9.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Y es] or [No], then press <Enter> to conîrm your choice. For more details, refer to section 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility . 3.9.2 Express Gate [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Express Gate feature. The ASUS Express Gate feature is a unique instant-on environment that provides quick access to the Internet browser and Skype. Conîguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] [Auto] Enter OS Timer [10 Seconds] Sets countdown duration that the system waits at the Express Gateâs îrst screen before starting Windows or other installed OS. Choose [Prompt User] to stay at the îrst screen of Express Gate for user action. Conîguration options: [Prompt User] [1 second] [3 seconds] [5 seconds] [10 seconds] [15 seconds] [20 seconds] [30 seconds] Reset User Data [No] Allows you to clear Express Gateâs user data. [Reset] When setting this item to [Reset], ensure that you save the setting to the BIOS so that the user data will be cleared the next time you enter the Express Gate. User data includes the Express Gateâs settings as well as any personal information stored by the web browser such as bookmarks, cookies, browsing history . This is useful in the rare case where corrupt settings prevent the Express Gate environment from launching properly .
3-38 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.9.3 ASUS O.C. Proîle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. Add Y our CMOS Proîle Allows you to save the current BIOS île to the BIOS Flash. In the Name sub-item, key in your proîle name and press <Enter>, and then choose a proîle number to save your CMOS settings in the Save to sub-item. Load CMOS Proîles. Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the île. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools Typing your proî¿le name, [0-9][a-z][A-Z] are acceptable. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 3 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 4 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 5 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 6 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 7 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 8 Status : Not Installed Status: Add Your CMOS Proî¿le. Name: [Default-Proî¿le] Save To: [Uninstalled] Load CMOS Proî¿les. Load From: [Blank] Start O.C. Proî¿le [No] Sets to [No] to disable the Reset User Data function when entering the Express Gate. The îrst time wizard will run again when you enter the Express Gate environment after clearing its settings.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-39 Chapter 3 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4 A89 GTD PR O VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V2.12 ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure! ⢠We rec ommend that you up date the BIO S île o nly com ing from th e sa me memor y/CPU conî guratio n an d BIOS v ersion. ⢠Only the CMO île can be loaded. 3.9.4 AI NET 2 Check Realtek LAN cable [Disabled] [Disabled] BIOS will not check the Realtek LAN cable during the Power-On Self-T est (POST). [Ena bled] BI OS che cks the Realt ek LAN cable during the Power -On Sel f-T est ( POST). 3.9.5 POST State LEDs [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard DRAM_LED. [Disabled] Disables this function. AI NET 2 Pair Status Length Check Realtek LAN cable [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools Start O.C. Proîle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility .
3-40 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.10 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are înished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîrmation window appears. Select Ok to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîrmation appears. Select Ok to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîrmation window appears. Select Ok to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-1 Chapter 4 If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. 4.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows ® XP/ 64-bit XP/ Vista / 64-bit V ista / 7 / 64-bit 7 operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 4.2 Support DVD information The support DVD that comes with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Ensure that you install the Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . The contents of the support DVD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for updates. Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.2.1 Running the support DVD Place the support DVD into the optical drive. The DVD automatically displays the Highlights menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click each menu tab and select the items you want to install. The Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to use the devices. The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. The Make Disk menu contains items to create the RAID/AHCI driver disk. The Manual menu contains the list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Click an icon to display DVD/ motherboard information Click an item to install Click the Highlights tab to display the software information Click to obtain the corresponding software manuals
4-2 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.2.2 Obtaining the software manuals The software manuals are included in the support DVD. Follow the instructions below to get the necessary software manuals. The software manual îles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe ® Acrobat ® Reader from the Utilities menu before opening the îles. The screenshots in this section are for reference only . The actual software manuals containing in the support DVD vary by models. 1. Click the Manual tab. Click ASUS Motherboard Utility Guide from the manual list on the left. 2. The Manual folder of the support DVD appears. Double-click the folder of your selected software. 3. Some software manuals are provided in different languages. Double-click the language to show the software manual.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-3 Chapter 4 4.3.1 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computerâs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Launching PC Probe II 1. Install PC Probe II from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Launch PC Probe II by clicking Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. 3. The PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows ® notiîcation area. Click this icon to close or restore the application. PC Probe II main window Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. Button Function Opens the Conîguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application 4.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support DVD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme île that came with the software application for more information.
4-4 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.2 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch several ASUS utilities easily . Launching AI Suite 1. Install AI Suite from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Launch AI Suite by clicking Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx. xx . The AI Suite main window appears. 3. The AI Suite icon appears in the Windows ® notiîcation area. If you minimize the application main window , click this icon to restore the window . Using AI Suite Click each utility button to launch the utility , or click the Normal button to restore system default settings. Click to launch each utility Click to restore default settings Click to open the monitor window that displays system information such as CPU temperature, CPU voltage, fan speed, and CPU/FSB frequency ⢠The screenshots in this section are for reference only . The actual utility buttons vary by models. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-5 Chapter 4 4.3.3 ASUS Fan Xpert Asus Fa n X pert al lows yo u to ad jus t bo th the CPU an d ch ass is f an spe eds acc ordi ng to diffe rent am bien t t emp erat ure s an d y our PCâ s s yste m l oadi ng. The vari ous fa n pr oîl es o ffer îexi ble co ntro ls of f an spee ds to achi eve a q uie t a nd c ool sys tem en viro nme nt. Launching Fan Xpert Afte r i nst alli ng AI Sui te from th e m othe rbo ard sup por t DV D, laun ch Fan Xpe rt by d oub le- clic kin g t he A I S uite tr ay icon an d th en clic kin g t he F an Xper t b utt on on the AI Su ite main wi ndo w . Using Fan Xpert Fan proîles ⢠Disable: Select this mode to disable the Fan Xpert function. ⢠Performance: This mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect ⢠Optimal: This mode adjusts the CPU fan speed with the ambient temperature. ⢠Silent: This mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation. ⢠Manual: This mode allows you to change the CPU fan proîle under certain limitation. Displays the current CPU/MB temperature and the fan speeds Click to cancel the settings and exit the Fan Xpert utility Click to select a fan type Click to select a fan proîle Click to apply the settings
4-6 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.4 ASUS EPU ASUS EPU is an energy-efîcient tool that provides you with a total system power-saving solution. It detects the current computer loading and intelligently adjusts the power in real-time. With auto phase switching for components, the EPU automatically provides the most appropriate power usage via intelligent acceleration and overclocking. ASUS EPU provides you with these modes to choose from: ⢠Auto Mode ⢠High Performance Mode When you select A uto Mode , the system shifts modes automatically according to the current system status. Y ou can also conîgure advanced settings for each mode. Launching EPU After installing EPU from the motherboard support DVD, double-click the EPU tray icon to launch the program. EPU main menu ⢠Max. Power Saving Mode ⢠EPU supports GPU power saving solution when you install the GPU Boost driver from the support DVD and set EPU to Auto or M aximum Power Saving Mode. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. Displays the following message if no VGA power saving engine is detected. GPU energy saving status GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the support DVD.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-7 Chapter 4 4.3.5 ASUS Express Gate ASUS Express Gate is an ASUS exclusive OS that provides you with quick access to the Internet and key applications before entering the Windows ® OS. Notices about ASUS Express Gate ⢠Ensure to install ASUS Express Gate from the motherboard support DVD before use. ⢠ASUS Express Gate does not support SA T A devices in RAID mode. See chapter 3 for BIOS setup details. ⢠Currently , ASUS Express Gate does not support SA T A 6Gb/s devices. Please visit http://support.asus.com for future Express Gate updates. ⢠ASUS Express Gate supports île uploading from ODD and USB drives and downloading to USB drives only . ⢠ASUS Express Gate supports installation on SA T A HDDs, USB HDDs and Flash drives with at least 1.2GB of available disk space. When installed on USB HDDs or Flash drives, connect the drive to the prior USB port (for example, USB port 1) before turning on the computer to speed the boot-up time. ⢠The display aspect of ASUS Express Gate can be affected due to different monitor speciîcations. Please adjust the screen resolution using Express Gate Conîguration Panel. ⢠Installation of at least 1GB system memory is recommended for better performance. The First Screen Express Gateâs îrst screen appears within a few seconds after you power on the computer . ⢠T o enter the motherboard BIOS setup program, click Exit on the Express Gate First Screen, and then press the <Del> key during POST . ⢠See the software manual in the bundled motherboard support DVD or click in the Express Gate environment for detailed software instructions. Click any of the application icons to enter Express Gate environment and launch the selected application T urn off the computer Click to immediately enter existing OS, or it will automatically continue booting to existing OS when the timer above the Exit icon counts down to zero (0).
4-8 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.6 Audio conîgurations The Realtek ® audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Detection function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The CODEC also includes the Realtek ® proprietary UAJ ® (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek ® Audio Driver from the support CD/DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will înd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar. Double- click on the icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager A. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows ® Vista⢠Control settings window Conîguration option tabs Information button Exit button Minimize button Device advanced settings Connector settings Analog and digital connector status Set default device button Control settings window Conîguration options Information button Exit button Minimize button B. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows XP
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-9 Chapter 4 4.3.7 ASUS GPU Boost ASUS GPU Boost allows you to overclock the integrated GPU in WIndows ® environment and takes effect in real-time without exiting and rebooting the OS. Refer to the CPU documentation before adjusting the integrated GPU voltage settings. Setting a high voltage may damage the integrated GPU permanently , and setting a low voltage may make the system unstable. ⢠ASUS GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. ⢠For system stability , all changes made in ASUS GPU Boost will not be saved to BIOS settings and will not be kept on the next system boot. Use the Save Proîle function to save your customized overclocking settings and manually load the proîle after Windows starts. ⢠When GPU Boost is enabled, ASUS EPU will be set to High Performance mode automatically . T o launch ASUS GPU Boost 1. Install the ASUS TurboV EVO utility from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Install the ASUS GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. 3. Click start > All Programs > ASUS > T urboV EVO > T urboV EVO . 4. Click More Settings from the T urboV EVO main screen, and then click GPU Boost. Y ou can adjust the GPU Engine Clock and GPU Voltage simultaneously in the TurboV Easy Mode . Adjustment sliders Start-up values T arget values Applies all changes immediately Undoes all changes without applying Click to restore all start-up settings
4-10 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.4 ASUS Unique Overclocking Utilityâ TurboV EVO ASUS T urboV EVO introduces T urboV , CPU Level UP and T urbo Key âthree powerful tools that allow you to overclock your system effectively . Install ASUS T urboV EVO from the support DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the T urboV EVO is correctly installed, you will înd the T urboV EVO icon on the Windows ® notiîcation area. Click on the icon to display the T urboV EVO control panel. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. ⢠When T urboV EVO is enabled, ASUS EPU will be set to High Performance mode automatically . 4.4.1 Using ASUS T urboV ASUS T urboV allow you to overclock the CPU frequency , CPU voltage, CPU/NB voltage, DRAM voltage, and the integrated GPU voltage/frequency in Windows ® environment and takes effect in real-time. Refer to the CPU documentation before adjusting CPU voltage settings. Setting a high voltage may damage the CPU permanently , and setting a low voltage may make the system unstable. For system stability , all changes made in ASUS TurboV (except for Auto T uning ) will not be saved to BIOS settings and will not be kept on the next system boot. Use the Save Proîle function to save your customized overclocking settings and manually load the proîle after Windows starts. ⢠GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. ⢠For advanced overclock ability , adjust îrst the BIOS items, and then proceed more detailed adjustments using T urboV . Save the current settings as a new proîle Click to show / hide more settings Applies all changes immediately Undoes all changes without applying Adjustment sliders Advanced CPU and chipset voltage settings Click to restore all start-up settings Start-up values T arget values Load proîle Manual Mode Easy Mode Auto T uning Mode Advanced GPU settings CPU ratio setting for each CPU core
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-1 1 Chapter 4 4.4.2 Using ASUS T urboV Auto T uning Mode The Auto T uning Mode allows smart auto-overclocking. Follow the instructions below to let T urboV EVO detect and overclock your system. ⢠After pressing Start, the system starts performance tuning and may reboot 2 to 3 times. An error message indicating incorrect system shut down may appear after system reboot. Please ignore the message and continue the tuning process. In addition, please do not operate or manually restart the computer during the tuning process. ⢠The auto-tuned system performance varies with the installed devices such as the CPU and DRAM. ⢠The auto-tuning function overclocks your system settings, including the frequency and voltage of the CPU and DRAM. Installation of advanced cooling systems is recommended. ⢠The auto-tuned settings will be stored in system BIOS and will take effect after the system automatically reboots. 1. Click the Auto T uning tab and then click Start. Y ou can also click More Settings îrst to conîgure more overclocking parameters before starting auto-overclocking. 3. TurboV automatically overclocks the CPU, saves BIOS settings and restarts the system. After re-entering Windows, a message appears indicating auto tuning success. Click OK to exit. 2. Read through the warning messages and click Y es to start auto-overclocking.
4-12 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.4.3 Using CPU Level UP CPU Level UP allows you to upgrade your CPU at no additional cost. Pick a CPU level you want to overclock to, and CPU Level UP will do the rest for you. 2. Read through the warning messages and click Y es to start upgrading the CPU and restart the system. 1. Click the CPU Level UP tab, pick a CPU level you want to overclock to by adjusting the slider , and then click Apply . The CPU Level UP function support depends on CPU types. 4.4.4 Using ASUS T urbo Key ASUS T urbo Key allows the user to set a group of hotkeys into physical overclocking buttons. After the easy setup, T urbo Key can boost performances without interrupting ongoing work or gamesâwith just one touch! Conîguring ASUS T urbo Key 1. Click the T urbo K ey tab . 2. Selec t your desire d hotke y comb ination . 3. Y ou can decide the performance boost level by selecting T urbo Key Proîle . Y ou can also load personal proîles saved in the T urboV tab. 4. Choose whether to show T urbo Key OSD and status. 5. Click Apply to save T urbo Key settings. Y ou have to press the assigned hotkeys to use the T urbo Key function. 1 2 3 4 5
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-13 Chapter 4 4.5 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with the AMD ® SB850 chipset that allows you to conîgure Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID conîgurations: RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 10. ⢠Y ou must install Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature is available only if you are using Windows ® XP SP2 or later versions. ⢠Due to Windows ® XP / V ista limitation, a RAID array with the total capacity over 2TB cannot be set as a boot disk. A RAID array over 2TB can only be set as a data disk only . ⢠If you want to install a Windows ® operating system to a hard disk drive included in a RAID set, you have to create a RAID driver disk and load the RAID driver during OS installation. Refer to section 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk for details. 4.5.1 RAID deînitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10 conîguration you get all the beneîts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup.
4-14 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. 4.5.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must enable the RAID function in the BIOS Setup before creating RAID volume(s) using SA T A HDDs. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main menu > Storage Conîguration, and then press <Enter>. 3. Set the OnChip SA T A T ype item to [RAID]. 4. Save your changes, and then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 3 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. When setting the OnChip SA T A T ype item to [RAID], all SA T A ports run at RAID mode. However , you can set the SA T A ports 5 and 6 to [Native IDE] or [AHCI] modes. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-15 Chapter 4 The Main Menu allows you to select an operation to perform. The Main Menu options include: ⢠View Drive Assignments: shows the status of the hard disk drives. ⢠LD View / LD Deîne Menu: displays the existing RAID set information / creates a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 or RAID 10 conîguration. ⢠Delete LD Menu: deletes a selected RAID set and partition. ⢠Controller Conîguration: shows the system resources conîguration. Press <1>, <2>, <3>, or <4> to enter the option you need; press <ESC> to exit the utility . The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only , and may not exactly match the items on your screen. T o create a RAID volume using more than four hard disk drives, ensure that the SA T A connectors 5/6 are set to [RAID] mode. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. View Drive Assignments ....... [ 1 ] LD View / LD Deî¿ne Menu ...... [ 2 ] Delete LD Menu ............... [ 3 ] Controller Conî¿guration ...... [ 4 ] [ Main Menu ] Press 1..4 to Select Option [ESC] Exit [ Keys Available ] 4.5.4 AMD ® Option ROM Utility T o enter the AMD ® Option ROM utility: 1. Boot up your computer . 2. During POST , press <Ctrl> <F> to display the utility main menu.
4-16 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 Creating a RAID volume T o create a RAID volume: 1. In the Main Menu, press <2> to enter the LD View / LD Deîne Menu function. 2. Press <Ctrl> <C>, and the following screen appears. 3. Move to the RAID Mode item and press <Space> to select a RAID mode to create. 4. Move to the Assignment item by using the down arrow key and set Y to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. 5. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to save the setting. 6. The utility prompts the following message. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to input the LD name. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [ â] Up [ â] Down [PaUp/PaDn] Switch page [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit [ Keys Available ] [ LD Deî¿ne Menu ] [ Drives Assignments ] Port:ID Drive Model Capabilities Capacity(GB) Assignment 01:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx Y 02:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx Y 03:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx N 04:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx N LD No LD Name RAID Mode Drv LD 1 Logical Drive 1 RAID 0 2 Strip Block 64 KB Fast Init ON Gigabyte Boundary ON Cache Mode WriteThru Please press Ctrl-Y key to input the LD Name or press any key to exit. If you do not input any LD name, the default LD name will be used. 7. Eenter an LD name, and then press any key to continue. Enter the LD name here: Fast Initialization Option has been selected It will erase the MBR data of the disks. <Press Ctrl-Y Key if you are sure to erase it> <Press any other key to ignore this option> 8. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to erase the MBR, or you may press any key to abort the settings. 9. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to enter the screen to modify the array capacity , or press any key to use the maximum capacity .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-17 Chapter 4 Deleting a RAID conîguration T ake caution when deleting a RAID volume. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID volume. T o delete a RAID volume: 1. In the Main Menu, press <3> to enter the Delete LD function. 2. Select the RAID item you want to delete and press <Del> or <Alt> <D>. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [ â] Up [ â] Down [PaUp/PaDn] Switch page [Del/Alt D] Delete LD [ Keys Available ] [ Delete LD Menu ] LD No RAID Mode Drv Capacity(GB) Status LD 1 RAID 0 2 xxxxxx Functional Dispalying a RAID set information T o display a RAID set information: 1. In the Main Menu, press <2> to enter the âLD View / LD Deîne Menuâ function. 2. Select a RAID item and press <Enter> to display its information. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Any Key To Continue....... [ View LD Deî¿nation Menu ] [ Drives Assignments ] Port:ID Drive Model Capabilities Capacity(GB) 01:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx 02:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx LD No LD Name RAID Mode Drv Capacity(GB) LD 1 xxxxx RAID 0 2 157.99 Strip Block 64 KB Cache Mode WriteThru 3. The utility prompts the following messages: Press <Ctrl> <Y> to delete the RAID volume. Press Ctrl-Y to delte the data in the disk! or press any other key to abort...
4-18 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk A îoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. For Windows ® Vista or later operating systems, use either a USB îash drive with the RAID driver or the support DVD. ⢠The motherboard does not provide a îoppy drive connector. Y ou have to use a USB îoppy disk drive when creating a SA T A RAID driver disk. ⢠Windows ® XP may not recognize the USB îoppy disk drive due to Windows ® XP limitation. T o work around this OS limitation, refer to section 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive . 4.6.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support DVD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. When the Make Disk menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 7. Insert a formatted îoppy disk into the USB îoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 8. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. 4.6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows ® T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® : 1. Start Windows ® . 2. Plug the USB îoppy disk drive and insert a îoppy disk. 3. Place the motherboard support DVD into the optical drive. 4. Go to the Make Disk menu, and then click AMD AHCI/RAID 32/64bit xxxx Driver to create a RAID driver disk. 5. Select USB îoppy disk drive as the destination disk. 6. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îoppy disk to avoid a computer virus infection. 4.6.3 Installing the RAID driver during Windows ® OS installation If you use a SA T A optical drive to run the OS installation disk, we strongly recommend that you install the optical dirve to the SA T A connectors 5/6 and set them to [Native IDE] mode. T o install the RAID driver for Windows ® XP 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Pre ss <F6 >, a nd the n i nser t t he îop py di sk with RA ID dri ver int o t he USB î opp y di sk dri ve.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-19 Chapter 4 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive Due to OS limitation, Windows ® XP may not recognize the USB îoppy disk drive when you install the RAID driver from a îoppy disk during the OS installation. T o solve this issue, add the USB îoppy disk driveâs V endor ID (VID) and Product ID (PID) to the îoppy disk containing the RAID driver . Refer to the steps below: 1. Using another computer , plug the USB îoppy disk drive, and insert the îoppy disk containing the RAID driver . 2. Right-click My Computer on the Windows ® desktop or start menu, and then select Manage from the pop-up window . 3. Select Device Manager . From the Universal Serial Bus controllers , right-click xxxxxx USB Floppy, and then select Properties from the pop-up window . The name of the USB îoppy disk drive varies with different vendors. or 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, select the RAID driver for the corresponding OS version. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. T o install the RAID driver for Windows ® Vista or later OS 1. During the OS installation, click L oad Driver to allow you to select the installation media containing the RAID driver . 2. Insert the USB îash drive with RAID driver into the USB port or the support DVD into the optical drive, and then click Browse. 3. Click the name of the device youâve inserted, go to Drivers > RAID , and then select the RAID driver for the corresponding OS version. Click OK. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Before loading the RAID driver from a USB îash drive, you have to use another computer to copy the RAID driver from the support DVD to the USB îash drive. 4. Click Details tab. The V endor ID (VID) and Product ID (PID) are displayed.
4-20 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 5. Browse the contents of the RAID driver disk to locate the île txtsetup.oem . 6. Double-click the île. A window appears, allowing you to select the program for opening the oem île. 7. Use Notepad to open the île. 8. Find the [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_i386_ahci8086] and [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_amd64_ahci] sections in the txtsetup.oem île. 9. T ype the following line to the bottom of the two sections: id = âUSB\VID_xxxx&PID_xxxxâ, âusbstorâ 10. Save and exit the île. Add the same line to both sections. The VID and PID vary with different vendors. [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_i386_ahci8086] id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4392&CC_0104â,âahcix86â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4391&CC_0106â,âahcix86â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4393&CC_0104â,âahcix86â id= âUSB\VID_03EE&PID_6901â, âusbstorâ [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_amd64_ahci] id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4392&CC_0104â,âahcix64â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4391&CC_0106â,âahcix64â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4393&CC_0104â,âahcix64â id= âUSB\VID_03EE&PID_6901â, âusbstorâ
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-1 Chapter 5 5.1.2 Before you begin For A TI CrossFireX to work properly , you have to uninstall all existing graphics card drivers before installing A TI CrossFireX graphics cards to your system. T o uninstall all existing graphics card drivers: 1. Close all current applications. 2. For Windows XP , go to Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs . For Windows Vista, go to Control Panel > Programs and Features. 3. Select your current graphics card drivers. 4. For Windows XP , select Add/Remove . For Windows Vista, select Uninstall. 5. Turn of f your computer. 5.1 ATI ® CrossFireX⢠technology The mot her boar d s uppo rts the A T I ® Cro ssF ire X⢠t ech nolo gy that al low s yo u t o in sta ll mult i-g rap hics pr oces sin g un its (G PU) gra phic s c ard s. F oll ow t he ins tall ati on p roc edur es in this se cti on. 5.1.1 Requirements ⢠Prepare two identical CrossFireX-ready graphics cards or one CrossFireX-ready dual- GPU graphics card that are A TI ® certiîed. ⢠Ensure that your graphics card driver supports the A TI CrossFireX technology . Download the latest driver from the AMD website at www .amd.com. ⢠Ensure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at least the minimum power required by your system. See Chapter 2 for details. ⢠We recommend that you install additional chassis fans for better thermal environment. ⢠Visit the AMD A TI website for the latest graphics card support list. Chapter 5: ATI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5
5-2 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 4. Align and îrmly insert the CrossFireX bridge connector to the goldîngers on each graphics card. Ensure that the connector is îrmly in place. Goldîngers CrossFireX bridge (bundled with graphics cards) 5. Connect two independent auxiliary power sources from the power supply to the two graphics cards separately . 6. Connect a VGA or a DVI cable to the graphics card. 5.1.3 Installing two CrossFireX⢠graphics cards The following pictures are for reference only . The graphics cards and the motherboard layout may vary with models, but the installation steps remain the same. 1. Prepare two CrossFireX-ready graphics cards. 2. Insert the two graphics card into the PCIEX16 slots. If your motherboard has more than two PCIEX16 slots, refer to Chapter 2 in this user manual for the locations of the PCIEX16 slots recommended for multi-graphics card installation. 3. Ensure that the cards are properly seated on the slots.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-3 Chapter 5 5.1.4 Installing the device drivers Refer to the documentation that came with your graphics card package to install the device drivers. Ensure that your PCI Express graphics card driver supports the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology . Download the latest driver from the AMD website (www.amd.com). 5.1.5 Enabling the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology After installing your graphics cards and the device drivers, enable the CrossFireX⢠feature through the A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center in Windows environment. Launching the A TI Catalyst Control Center T o launch the A TI Catalyst Control Center 1. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop and select Catalyst(TM) Control Center . Y ou can also right- click the A TI icon in the Windows notiîcation area and select Cayalist Control Center. 2. The Catalyst Control Center Setup Assistant appears when the system detects the existance of multi-graphics cards. Click Go to continue to the Catalyst Control Center Advanced View window . Enabling CrossFireX settings 1. In the Catalyst Control Center window , click Graphics Settings > CrossFireX > Conîgure . 2. From the Graphics Adapter list, select the graphics card to act as the display GPU. 3. Select Enable CrossFireX . 4. Click Apply , and then click OK to exit the window . 4 3 2 1
5-4 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 5.2 ATI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology The motherboard supports the A TI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology that allows you to install multi-graphics processing units (GPU) CrossFireX cards. 5.2.1 System requirements Before using A TI Hybrid CrossFireX, ensure that your system meets the following basic requirements: ⢠Operating System: Windows ® Vista ⢠Memory capacity: Minimum 1GB ⢠CPU: AM3 ⢠On-board graphics card RAM: 256MB Visit the AMD A TI website for the latest graphics card support list. 5.2.2 Before you proceed Conîgure the BIOS settings for the graphics card to support A TI Hybrid CrossFireX. T o set Internal Graphics: 1. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup utility . 2. Go to the Ai T weaker menu and set UMA Frame Buffer Size to [256M] or above 3. Select Advanced > Chipset > 890GX Conîguration > Internal Graphics Conîguration , set Surround View to [Enabled]. 4. Press <F10> to save the changes and exit BIOS settings. Select OK to conîrm. 5.2.3 Installing AMD Chipset Driver T o install the driver that supports Hybrid CrossFireX technology: 1. Insert the Support DVD that comes with your motherboard into the optical d rive. The DVD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. 2. From the Drivers menu, click AMD Chipset Driver to install it. Follow the onscreen instructions to înish the installation. 3. Restart your computer after the installation is completed. 4. When the system restarts, wait for a few seconds for the driver to load automatically .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-5 Chapter 5 5.2.4 Using the A TI ® CA T AL YST ® Control Center Using an add-on graphics card 1. Install a graphics card onto your motherboard. Refer to the User Guide that comes with your graphics card for details. 2. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 3. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then select the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation message pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 4. Click OK . The add-on graphics card is set to be the main monitor . Using the onboard graphics card 1. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, and then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 2. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then clear the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation message pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 3. Click OK .
5-6 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 1. Follow steps 1 to 3 on Using the onboard graphics card. 2. From the A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center screen, click Display Manager > Graphics Adapter . Select A TI Radeon HD 3200 Graphics [Gabbs, G HW173] . Click OK, and then Y es from the conîrmation window . 3. Follow steps 6 to step 8 on Using the onboard graphics card to complete the process of setting up the onboard graphics card as your main monitor . If you are using both an add-on and the on-board graphics cards at same time and want to set the onboard graphics card as your main monitor , follow the below instructions. 4. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click Personalize from the shortcut menu. 5. Click Display Settings . Select [Default Monitor] on A TI Radeon HD 3200 Graphics , then select the check boxes of This is my main monitor and Extend the desktop onto this monitor . Click OK, and then Y es from the conîrmation window . 6. Restart the system. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 7. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then select the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 8. Click OK . The onboard graphics card is set to be the main monitor .
ASUS contact information ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. Address 15 Li-T e Road, Peitou, T aipei, T aiwan 1 1259 T elephone 886-2-2894-3447 Fax 886-2-2890-7798 E-mail info@asus.com.tw Web site www.asus.com.tw T echnical Support T elephone 86-21-3842991 1 Online support support.asus.com ASUS COMPUTER INTERNA TIONAL (America) Address 800 Corporate Way , Fremont, CA 94539, USA T elephone 1-812-282-3777 Fax 1-510-608-4555 Web site usa.asus.com T echnical Support T elephone 1-812-282-2787 Support fax 1-812-284-0883 Online support support.asus.com ASUS COMPUTER GmbH (Germany and Austria) Address Harkort Str. 21-23, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany Fax 49-2102-95991 1 Web site www.asus.de Online contact www .asus.de/sales T echnical Support T elephone 49-1805-010923 Support Fax 49-2102-9599-1 1 Online support support.asus.com
EC Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer: ASUSTek COMPUTER INC. Address, City: No. 150, LI-TE RD., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN R.O.C . Country: TAIWAN Authorized representative in Europe: ASUS COMPUTER GmbH Address, City: HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN Country: GERMANY declare the following apparatus: Product name : Mother board Model name : M4A89GTD PRO conform with the essential requirements of the following directives: 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2 006 A1:2007 EN 61000-3 -2:2006 EN 55013:2 001 A1:2003 A2:2006 EN 55024:1 998 A1:2001 A2:2003 EN 61000-3 -3:1995 A1:2001 A2:2005 EN 55020:2 007 1999/5/EC-R &TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.7.1(2006-05) EN 300 440-1 V1.4.1(2008-05) EN 300 440-2 V1.2.1(2008-03) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1(2007-05) EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1(2007-05) EN 301 893 V1.4.1(2005-03) EN 50360:2 001 EN 50371:2 002 EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1(2008-04) EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V1.3.2(2008-04) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1(2007-09) EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2(2007-06) EN 302 326-3 V1.3.1(2007-09) 2006/95/EC-L VD Directive EN 60950-1: 2001 A1 1:2004 EN 60950-1:2006 EN6006 5:2002 A1:2006 2005/32/EC-EuP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 EN 62301:2 005 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 EN 62301:2 005 CE marking Declaration Date: Jan. 18, 2010 Y ear to begin affixing CE marking:2010 Position : CEO Name : Jerry Shen Signature : __________ (EC conformity marking) DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC Part 2 Section 2. 1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Asus Computer International Address: 800 Corporate Way, Fremont , CA 94539. Phone/Fax No: (510)739-3777/(510)608-4555 hereby declares that the product Product Name : Mother board Model Number : M4A89GTD PRO Conforms to the following specifications: FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part B, Unintentional Radiators FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part C, Intentional Radiators FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part E, Intentional Radiators Supplementary Information: Thi s device compl ies with part 15 of the FCC Rules . Opera tion is subjec t to the fol lowi ng two condi tions: (1) Thi s devic e may not cau se harm ful int erfe rence, and (2) this devi ce must acc ept any int erfere nce recei ved, inc ludi ng int erfere nce th at may cause undes ired o perati on. Represent ative Personâs Name : Steve Chang / President Signature : Date : Jan. 18, 2010
ii E5290 First Edition (V1) February 2010 Copyright © 2010 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîed or altered, unless such repair , modiîcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneît, without intent to infringe. Offer to Provide Source Code of Certain Software This product may contain copyrighted software that is licensed under the General Public License (âGPLâ) and under the Lesser General Public License V ersion (âLGPLâ). The GPL and LGPL licensed code in this product is distributed without any warranty . Copies of these licenses are included in this product. Y ou may obtain the complete corresponding source code (as deîned in the GPL) for the GPL Software, and/or the complete corresponding source code of the LGPL Software (with the complete machine- readable âwork that uses the Libraryâ) for a period of three years after our last shipment of the product including the GPL Software and/or LGPL Software, which will be no earlier than December 1, 201 1, either (1) for free by downloading it from http://support.asus.com/download ; or (2) for the cost of reproduction and shipment, which is dependent on the preferred carrier and the location where you want to have it shipped to, by sending a request to: ASUST eK Computer Inc. Legal Compliance Dept. 15 Li T e Rd., Beitou, T aipei 1 12 T aiwan In your request please provide the name, model number and version, as stated in the About Box of the product for which you wish to obtain the corresponding source code and your contact details so that we can coordinate the terms and cost of shipment with you. The source code will be distributed WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY and licensed under the same license as the corresponding binary/object code. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information. ASUST eK is eager to duly provide complete source code as required under various Free Op en Source Software licenses. If however you encounter any problems in obtaining the full corresponding source code we would be much obliged if you give us a notiîcation to the email address gpl@asus.com , stating the product and describing the problem (please do NOT send large attachments such as source code archives etc to this email address).
iii Contents Contents ...................................................................................................................... iii Notices ...................................................................................................................... vii Safety information .................................................................................................... viii About this guide ......................................................................................................... ix M4A89GTD PRO speciîcations summary ............................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features .......................................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ........................................................................ 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Processor .................................. 1-2 1.3.3 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Switches* ................................... 1-3 1.3.4 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid OS ............................................. 1-3 1.3.5 ASUS unique features ................................................................. 1-3 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed ................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview ............................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Motherboard layout ..................................................................... 2-2 2.2.2 Layout contents ........................................................................... 2-3 2.2.3 Placement direction ..................................................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Screw holes ................................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ....................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ............................................ 2-7 2.4 System memory ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations .............................................................. 2-1 1 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ...................................................................... 2-16 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................................... 2-16 2.5 Expansion slots ........................................................................................ 2-17 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card ...................................................... 2-17 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card ................................................. 2-17 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................................ 2-18 2.5.4 PCI slots .................................................................................... 2-19 2.5.5 PCI Express 2.0 x4 / x1 slots .................................................... 2-19 2.5.6 PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots ......................................................... 2-19 2.6 Jumper ...................................................................................................... 2-21 2.7 Onboard switches .................................................................................... 2-22
iv Contents 2.8 Connectors ............................................................................................... 2-25 2.8.1 Rear panel connectors .............................................................. 2-25 2.8.2 Audio I/O connections ............................................................... 2-28 2.8.3 Internal connectors .................................................................... 2-30 2.8.4. ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) .......................................... 2-38 2.9 Onboard LEDs .......................................................................................... 2-39 2.10 Starting up for the îrst time .................................................................... 2-41 2.1 1 T urning off the computer ......................................................................... 2-41 Chapter 3: BIOS setup 3.1 Knowing BIOS ............................................................................................ 3-1 3.2 Updating BIOS ............................................................................................ 3-1 3.2.1 ASUS Update utility ..................................................................... 3-2 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ............................................................... 3-4 3.2.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ................................................... 3-5 3.2.4 ASUS BIOS Updater ................................................................... 3-6 3.3 BIOS setup program .................................................................................. 3-9 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen ...................................................................... 3-9 3.3.2 Menu bar ..................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.3 Navigation keys ......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.4 Menu items ................................................................................ 3-10 3.3.5 Submenu items ......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.6 Conîguration îelds ................................................................... 3-10 3.3.7 Pop-up window .......................................................................... 3-10 3.3.8 Scroll bar ................................................................................... 3-10 3.3.9 General help .............................................................................. 3-10 3.4 Main menu ................................................................................................ 3-1 1 3.4.1 SA T A 1â6 .................................................................................. 3-1 1 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration ............................................................... 3-13 3.4.3 System Information ................................................................... 3-14 3.5 Ai T weaker menu ...................................................................................... 3-15 3.5.1 CPU Level UP ........................................................................... 3-15 3.5.2 OC T uner Utility ......................................................................... 3-16 3.5.3 Ai Overclock T uner .................................................................... 3-16 3.5.4 CPU Ratio ................................................................................. 3-17 3.5.5 DRAM Frequency ...................................................................... 3-17 3.5.6 CPU/NB Frequency ................................................................... 3-17 3.5.7 HT Link Speed .......................................................................... 3-17 3.5.8 DRAM T iming Conîguration ...................................................... 3-17
v 3.5.9 DRAM Driving Conîguration ..................................................... 3-18 3.5.10 CPU & NB V oltage Mode .......................................................... 3-19 3.5.1 1 CPU VDDA Voltage ................................................................... 3-19 3.5.12 DRAM V oltage ........................................................................... 3-19 3.5.13 CPU Load-Line Calibration ....................................................... 3-20 3.5.14 CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration ................................................. 3-20 3.5.15 CPU Spread Spectrum .............................................................. 3-20 3.5.16 PCIE Spread Spectrum ............................................................. 3-20 3.5.17 HT V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.18 NB V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.19 NB 1.8V V oltage ........................................................................ 3-20 3.5.20 SB V oltage ................................................................................ 3-20 3.5.21 SidePort Memory V oltage ......................................................... 3-20 3.5.22 Internal Graphics Mode ............................................................. 3-21 3.5.23 GFX Engine Clock Override ...................................................... 3-21 3.6 Advanced menu ....................................................................................... 3-22 3.6.1 CPU Conîguration .................................................................... 3-22 3.6.2 Chipset ...................................................................................... 3-23 3.6.3 Onboard Devices Conîguration ................................................ 3-26 3.6.4 USB Conîguration .................................................................... 3-27 3.6.5 PCIPnP ..................................................................................... 3-28 3.7 Power menu .............................................................................................. 3-29 3.7.1 Suspend Mode .......................................................................... 3-29 3.7.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume .................................................... 3-29 3.7.3 ACPI 2.0 Support ...................................................................... 3-29 3.7.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................................... 3-29 3.7.5 APM Conîguration .................................................................... 3-30 3.7.6 Hardware Monitor ...................................................................... 3-31 3.8 Boot menu ................................................................................................ 3-33 3.8.1 Boot Device Priority ................................................................... 3-33 3.8.2 Boot Settings Conîguration ...................................................... 3-34 3.8.3 Security ..................................................................................... 3-35 3.9 T ools menu ............................................................................................... 3-37 3.9.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 ...................................................................... 3-37 3.9.2 Express Gate ............................................................................ 3-37 3.9.3 ASUS O.C. Proîle ..................................................................... 3-38 3.9.4 AI NET 2 .................................................................................... 3-39 3.9.5 POST State LEDs ..................................................................... 3-39 3.10 Exit menu .................................................................................................. 3-40 Contents
vi Chapter 4: Software support 4.1 Installing an operating system ................................................................. 4-1 4.2 Support DVD information .......................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Running the support DVD ........................................................... 4-1 4.2.2 Obtaining the software manuals .................................................. 4-2 4.3 Software information ................................................................................. 4-3 4.3.1 ASUS PC Probe II ....................................................................... 4-3 4.3.2 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................................. 4-4 4.3.3 ASUS Fan Xpert .......................................................................... 4-5 4.3.4 ASUS EPU .................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.5 ASUS Express Gate .................................................................... 4-7 4.3.6 Audio conîgurations .................................................................... 4-8 4.3.7 ASUS GPU Boost ....................................................................... 4-9 4.4 ASUS Unique Overclocking UtilityâT urboV EVO ................................. 4-10 4.4.1 Using ASUS T urboV .................................................................. 4-10 4.4.2 Using ASUS T urboV Auto Tuning Mode .................................... 4-1 1 4.4.3 Using CPU Level UP ................................................................. 4-12 4.4.4 Using ASUS T urbo Key ............................................................. 4-12 4.5 RAID conîgurations ................................................................................ 4-13 4.5.1 RAID deînitions ........................................................................ 4-13 4.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ................................................. 4-14 4.5.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS .................................................. 4-14 4.5.4 AMD ® Option ROM Utility .......................................................... 4-15 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................................................... 4-18 4.6.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS ................ 4-18 4.6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows ® .................................. 4-18 4.6.3 Installing the RAID driver during Windows ® OS installation ...... 4-18 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive ................................................... 4-19 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support 5.1 A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology .................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Requirements .............................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Before you begin ......................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Installing two CrossFireX⢠graphics cards ................................ 5-2 5.1.4 Installing the device drivers ......................................................... 5-3 5.1.5 Enabling the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology ............................... 5-3 5.2 A TI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology ...................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 System requirements .................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Before you proceed ..................................................................... 5-4 5.2.3 Installing AMD Chipset Driver ..................................................... 5-4 5.2.4 Using the A TI ® CA T AL YST ® Control Center ................................ 5-5 Contents
vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we published the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://green.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. DO NOT throw the motherboard in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. DO NOT throw the mercury-containing button cell battery in municipal waste. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste.
viii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Ensu re tha t your power supply is set to th e co rrect voltage in yo ur area . If y ou are not su re abou t the voltage of th e elect rical outlet you are u sing, c ontact your l ocal p ower co mpany . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, ensure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠Avoid dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualiîed service technician or your retailer .
ix About this guide Th is u se r gu id e co nt ai ns t he in fo rm at io n yo u ne ed w he n i ns ta ll in g an d co nî gu ri ng t he m ot he rb oa rd. How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 4: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package and the software. ⢠Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support This chapter describes the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠feature and shows the graphics card installation procedures. Where to înd more information Refe r to t he foll owing sources for a dditio nal inform ation a nd for produc t and softwar e upda tes. 1. ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. Optional documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty îyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package.
x Conventions used in this guide T o ensure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T ypography Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italic s Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key . Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key . <K ey 1> < Ke y2 > <K ey 3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously , the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to help you complete a task.
xi M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary (continued on the next page) CPU AMD ® Socket AM3; Phenom⢠II / Athlon⢠II / Sempron⢠100 Series Processors AMD ® 140W CPU Support AMD ® Cool ânâ Quiet⢠T echnology Supports 45nm CPU Chipset AMD ® 890GX / SB850 System bus Up to 5200 MT/s; HyperT ransport⢠3.0 Memory 4 x DIMM, max. 16GB, DDR3 2000(O.C.) / 1333 / 1066 MHz, ECC / non-ECC, un-buffered memory Dual channel memory architecture * When you install a total memory of 4 GB capacity or more, Windows ® 32-bit operating system may only recognize less than 3 GB. We recommend using a maximum of 3 GB system memory if you are using a Windows ® 32-bit OS. ** Refer to www .asus.com or this user manual for the Memory QVL (Qualiîed V endors Lists) Expansion slots 2 x PC I Ex pre ss 2.0 x16 sl ots, sup por t A TI ® Cr ossF ireX ⢠Q uad- GPU T echnology (@ dual x8 speed) 1 x PCI Express 2.0 x4 slot 1 x PCI Express 2.0 x1 slot 2 x PCI slots VGA Output Integrated A TI ® Radeon⢠HD 4290 GPU Multi-VGA output support: HDMI, DVI-D, and RGB ports Supports HDMI with max. resolution 1920 x 1200 (1080P) Supports DVI with max. resolution 2560 x 1600 @60Hz Supports RGB with max. resolution 2560 x 1440 @75Hz Supports H.264, VC-1, MPEG-2, DirectX 10.1 and OpenGL 2.0 Supports Shader Model 4.1, Universal Video Decoder (UVD) 2.0 Maximum UMA memory size: 512 MB 128 MB DDR3 1333 sideport memory support Hybrid CrossFireX support Storage AMD ® SB850 chipset - 6 x SA T A 6.0 Gb/s ports with RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10 support JMicron ® JMB361 P A T A and SA T A controller - 1 x Power eSA T A 3.0 Gb/s port - 1 x Ultra DMA 133/100 for up to 2 P A T A devices LAN Realtek ® 81 1 1E Gigabit LAN controller featuring AI NET2 Audio ALC892 8-channel High Deînition Audio CODEC - BD Audio Layer Content Protection - Supports 192khz/24bit T rue BD Lossless Sound - DTS Surround Sensation UltraPC - Supports Jack-Detection, Multi-Streaming, and Front Panel Jack-Retasking - Optical S/PDIF Out port at back I/O - ASUS Noise Filter USB 14 x USB 2.0 ports (8 ports at midboard, 6 ports at back panel)
xii (continued on the next page) M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary IEEE 1394 VIA ® VT6308P controller supports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports (one at midboard, one at back panel) ASUS unique features ASUS Xtreme Design ASUS Hybrid Processor â TurboV EVO - TurboV, Auto Tuning, CPU Level UP and GPU Boost ASUS Hybrid OS â Express Gate ASUS Hybrid Switches - Turbo Key II - Core Unlocker ASUS Power Solutions - 8 2 Phase Power Design - ASUS EPU ASUS Exclusive Features - MemOK! ASUS Quiet Thermal Solutions - ASUS Fanless Design: Heat pipe solution - ASUS Fan Xpert ASUS EZ DIY - ASUS Q-Design - ASUS O.C. Proîle - ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 - ASUS EZ Flash 2 - ASUS MyLogo 2⢠- Multi-language BIOS ASUS exclusive overclocking features Precision T weaker 3 - vCore: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.003125V increment - vDDNB : Adjusta ble CPU NB volt age at 0.00312 5V i ncrement - vCPU PLL: Adjustable CPU PLL voltage at 0.00625V increment - vHT Bus: Adjustable PCH voltage at 0.00625V increment - vDRAM Bus: Adjustable DRAM voltage at 0.00625V increment - vChipset: Ad justable Chipset voltag e at 0.00625V incremen t SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) - Internal Base Clock tuning from 100MHz up to 600MHz at 1MHz increment - PCI Express frequency tuning from 100MHz up to 150MHz at 1MHz increment Overclocking protection - ASUS C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall)
xiii *Speciîcations are subject to change without notice. M4A89GTD PRO speciî¿cations summary Back panel I/O ports 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x HDMI Out port 1 x DVI-D Out port 1 x D-Sub Out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Extternal SA T A port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 6 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports 8-channel Audio I/O ports Internal I/O connectors 4 x USB connectors support additional 8 USB ports 1 x IDE connector 6 x SA T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors 1 x CPU Fan connector 2 x Chassis Fan connectors (1 x 4-pin, 1 x 3-pin) 1 x Power Fan connector 1 x IEEE1394a connector 1 x S/PDIF Out header 1 x Core Unlocker switch 1 x T urbo Key II switch 1 x MemOK! button Front panel audio connector 1 x COM connector 24-pin A TX Power connector 8-pin EA TX 12V Power connector System Panel BIOS features 16 Mb Flash ROM, SPI, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI 2.0, WfM 2.0, SM B IOS 2.5, ACPI 2.0a, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flas h 2, ASUS Cr ashF ree BIOS 3 Manageability WfM 2.0, DMI 2.0, WOL by PME, WOR by PME, PXE Support DVD contents Drivers ASUS Utilities ASUS Update Anti-virus software (OEM version) Form factor A TX form factor: 12 in. x 9.6 in. (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm)
xiv
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 1-1 Chapter 1 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® M4A89GTD PRO motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. ⢠If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ⢠The illustrated items above are for reference only . Actual product speciîcations may vary with different models. User Manual ASUS M4A89GTD PRO motherboard User guide Support DVD 2 x Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s cables with 6.0 Gb /s l abel 2 x Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s cables 1 x Ultra DMA 133/ 100/66 cable 1 x ASUS Q-Shield 1 x VGA switch card 1 x 2-i n- 1 AS US Q- Co nne ct or ki t
1-2 Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights AM D ® P hen om⢠II / Ath lon ⢠I I / Se mpr on⢠1 00 Se rie s Pr oce sso rs (s oc ket AM3 ) This motherboard supports AMD ® AM3 multi-core processors with unique L3 cache and delivers better overclocking capabilities with less power consumption. It features dual-channel DDR3 1333 memory support and accelerates data transfer rate up to 5200MT/s via HyperT ransport⢠3.0 based system bus. This motherboard also supports AMD ® CPUs in the new 45nm manufacturing process. AMD ® 890GX Chipset AMD ® 890GX Chipset is designed to support up to 5200MT/s HyperT ransport⢠3.0 (HT 3.0) interface speed and PCI Express⢠2.0 x16 graphics. It is optimized with AMD ® âs latest AM3 and multi-core CPUs to provide excellent system performance and overclocking capabilities. Dual-Channel DDR3 2000(O.C.) / 1333 / 1066 support The mother board s upport s DDR3 memory that feat ures d ata tra nsfer rates o f 2000 (O.C.) / 1333 / 106 6 MHz t o meet the hi gher b andwid th r equire ments o f the latest 3D gra phics, mult imedia , and I nterne t appli cation s. Th e dual -channe l DDR3 archit ecture enlarg es the band width of your syste m memor y to b oost s yste m perf ormance . Refe r to pa ge 2-1 0 for d etails . A TI ® CrossFireX⢠T echnology A TIâs CrossFireX⢠boosts image quality along with rendering speed, eliminating the need to scale down screen resolution to get high quality images. CrossFireX⢠allows higher antialiasing, anisotropic îltering, shading, and texture settings. Adjust your display conîgurations, experiment with the advanced 3D settings, and check the effects with a real-time 3D-rendered previews within A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center . AMD ® SB850 Chipset The AMD ® SB850 Southbridge natively supports the next generation SA T A 6.0 Gb/s data transfer rate and PCI Express 2.0 interface. 1.3.2 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Processor* T urboV EVO The ultimate O.C. processor satisîes every level of overclockersâfrom die-hard enthusiasts to beginners. Auto tuning intelligently pushes the system to the fastest clock speeds while maintaining stability . Turbo Key boosts performance with just one touch; while TurboV of fers more options to advanced overclockers to achieve world O.C. record. Moreover , upgrade your CPU at no additional cost with CPU Level UP! Refer to page 4-10 for details. Auto T uning Auto T uning is an intelligent tool that automates overclocking to achieve a total system level up. This tool also provides stability testing. Even O.C. beginners can achieve extreme yet stable overclocking results with Auto T uning!
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 1-3 Chapter 1 GPU Boost GPU Boost overclocks the integrated GPU in real time for the best graphics performance. User-friendly UI facilitates îexible frequency and voltage adjustments. Its ability to deliver multiple overclocking proîles also provides rapid and stable system-level upgrades. Refer to page 4-9 for details. 1.3.3 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid Switches* T urbo Key II Enjo y supe rb perf ormanc e by au to-tun ing yo ur p rocess or to a n extr eme yet stabl e state . Simp ly acti vate a dedica ted sw itch on the m otherb oard to un leash e xtra p rocessi ng cap abiliti es. Refer to page 2-23 for details. Core Unlocker ASUS Core Unlocker simpliîes the activation of a latent AMD ® CPUâwith just a simple switch. Enjoy an instant performance boost by simply unlocking the extra cores, without performing complicated BIOS changes. Refer to page 2-24 for details. * The actual overclocking result depends on the system conîguration. 1.3.4 ASUS Xtreme DesignâHybrid OS Express Gate Expr ess Ga te is a n ASUS exclusi ve OS that p rovi des yo u with quick access to the Intern et and key applic ations before enteri ng the Windo ws ® OS. Refer to pag es 3-3 7 and 4 -7 for detai ls. 1.3.5 ASUS unique features ASUS Power Solutions ASUS Power solutions intelligently and automatically provide balanced computing power and energy consumption. 8 2 Phase Power Design T o fully unleash the next-generation AM3 CPUâs potential, the ASUS M4A89GTD PRO motherboard has adopted the brand new 8-phase VRM power design, which delivers high power efîciency and supreme overclocking ability . These high quality power components effectively lower system temperature to ensure longer component lifespan. This motherboard also features an extra 2 phase power dedicated to integrated memory/HT controller . ASUS EPU The ASUS EPU (Energy Processing Unit) provides total system power management by detecting current PC loadings and intelligently moderating power usage for critical PC components in real-timeâhelping save power and money! Refer to page 4-6 for details. MemOK! Memory compatibility is among the top concerns during computer upgrades. Worry no more. MemOK! is the fastest memory booting solution today . This remarkable memory rescue tool requires nothing but a push of a button to patch memory issues and get your system up and running in no time. The technology is able to determine failsafe settings that can dramatically improve your system booting success. Refer to page 2-22 for details.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1 ASUS Quiet Thermal Solutions ASUS Quiet Thermal solution makes system more stable and enhances the overclocking capability . ASUS Fanless DesignâHeat pipe solution The ASUS heat pipe features 0-dB thermal solution that offers users a noiseless PC environment. Not only the beautiful shape upgrades the visual enjoyment for motherboard users, but also the heat pipe design lowers the temperature of the chipset and power phase area through high efîcient heat-exchange. Combined with usability and aesthetics, the ASUS heat pipe will give users an extremely silent and cooling experience with the elegant appearance! Fan Xpert ASUS Fan Xpert intelligently allows you to adjust both the CPU and chassis fan speeds according to different ambient temperatures caused by dif ferent climate conditions in different geographic regions and your PCâs loading. The built-in variety of useful proîles offer îexible controls of fan speed to achieve a quiet and cool environment. Refer to page 4-5 for details. ASUS EZ DIY ASUS EZ DIY feature collection provides you with easy ways to install computer components, update the BIOS or back up your favorite settings. ASUS Q-Design ASUS Q-Design enhances your DIY experience. Both of Q-Slot and Q-DIMM design speed up and simplify the DIY process! ASUS O.C. Proîle The motherboard features the ASUS O.C. Proîle that allows you to conveniently store or load multiple BIOS settings. The BIOS settings can be stored in the CMOS or a separate île, giving you the freedom to share and distribute your favorite settings. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 allows you to restore corrupted BIOS data from a USB îash disk containing the BIOS île. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. ASUS EZ-Flash 2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 is a user-friendly utility that allows you to update the BIOS without using a bootable îoppy disk or an OS-based utility . Refer to page 3-4 for details. Precision T weaker 3 Allows you to adjust the CPU/NB voltage in 0.003125V steps and DRAM voltage in 0.00625V steps to îne-tune voltage to achieve the most precise setting for the ultimate overclocking conîguration.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-1 Chapter 2 2.1 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Before handling components, use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, or components. Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.2.1 Motherboard layout Refer to 2.8 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors. 2.2 Motherboard overview
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-3 Chapter 2 2.2.2 Layout contents Connectors/Jumpers/Slots Page 1. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) 2-36 2. AM3 CPU Socket 2-5 3. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 4-pin CHA_F AN1, 3-pin CHA_FAN2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 2-34 4. DDR3 DIMM slots 2-10 5. Core Unlocker switch (CORE_UNLOCKER) 2-24 6. T urbo Key II switch (TURBO_KEY_II) 2-23 7. MemOK! switch 2-22 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-32 9. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE) 2-30 10. Standby power LED (SB_PWR) 2-39 1 1. AMD ® SB850 Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors (7-pin SA T A1â6) 2-31 12. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) 2-37 13. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC) 2-21 14. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12, USB1314) 2-33 15. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) 2-35 16. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) 2-32 17. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-35
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.2.3 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, ensure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.2.4 Screw holes Place nine screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. DO NOT overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-5 Chapter 2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with an AM3 socket designed for AMD ® Phenom⢠II / Athlon⢠II / Sempron⢠100 Series Processors. The AM3 socket has a different pinout from the 940-pin socket designed for the AMD Opteron processor . Ensure that you use a CPU designed for the AM3 socket. The CPU îts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! Ensure that all power cables are unplugged before installing the CPU. 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. Ensure that the socket lever is lifted up to a 90º angle. Otherwise, the CPU will not ît in completely . 2. Press the lever sideways to unlock the socket, then lift it up to a 90º angle. Socket lever
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that the CPU corner with the gold triangle matches the sock et corner with a small triangle. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it îts in place. 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold triangle Small triangle 6. Apply s ome Ther mal In ter fac e Mate ria l to the exposed area of the CPU that the heatsink will be in contact with, ensuring that it is spread in an even thin layer . Some heatsinks come with pre-applied thermal paste. If so, skip this step. The Thermal Interface Material is toxic and inedib le. DO NOT eat it. If it gets into your eyes or touches your skin, wash it off immediately , and seek professional medical help. T o prevent contaminating the paste, DO NOT spread the paste with your înger .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-7 Chapter 2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The AMD ® AM3 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. T o install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, ensuring that the heatsink îts properly on the retention module base. Y our boxed CPU heatsink and fan assembly should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter . ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠Y ou do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly , ensure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly . Ensure that you use only AMD-certiîed heatsink and fan assembly . R e t e n t i o n m o d u l e base CPU heatsink CPU fan Retention bracket lock Retention bracket
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2. Attach one end of the retention bracket to the retention module base. 3. Align the other end of the retention bracket to the retention module base. A clicking sound denotes that the retention bracket is in place. 4. Push down the retention bracket lock on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. Ensure that the fan and heatsink assembly perfectly îts the retention mechanism module base, otherwise you cannot snap the retention bracket in place.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-9 Chapter 2 5. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . ⢠This connector is backward compatible with old 3-pin CPU fan.
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 3 (DDR3) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR3 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR2 DIMM but is notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR2 DIMM socket. DDR3 modules are developed for better performance with less power consumption. The îgure illustrates the location of the DDR3 DIMM sockets: Recommended memory conîgurations One DIMM: Install one memory module in any slot as a single-channel operation. T wo DIMMs (dual-channel operation): Four DIMMs (dual-channel operation):
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-1 1 Chapter 2 2.4.2 Memory conîgurations Y ou may install 512MB, 1GB, 2GB and 4GB unbuffered ECC and non-ECC DDR3 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠The default memory operation frequency is dependent on its Serial Presence Detect (SPD), which is the standard way of accessing information from a memory module. Under the default state, some memory modules for overclocking may operate at a lower frequency than the vendor-marked value. T o operate at the vendor-marked or at a higher frequency , refer to section 3.5 Ai T weaker menu for manual memory frequency adjustment. ⢠For system stability , use a more efîcient memory cooling system to support a full memory load (4 DIMMs) or overclocking condition. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠We recommend that you install the memory modules from the blue slots for better overclocking capability . ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , we recommend that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠Due to the memory address limitation on 32-bit Windows OS, when you install 4GB or more memory on the motherboard, the actual usable memory for the OS can be about 3GB or less. For effective use of memory , we recommend that you do any of the following: - Use a maximum of 3GB system memory if you are using a 32-bit Windows OS. - Install a 64-bit Windows OS when you want to install 4GB or more on the motherboard. For more details, refer to the Microsoft ® support site at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/929605/en-us. ⢠This motherboard does not support DIMMs made up of 512Mb (64MB) chips or less (Memory chip capacity counts in Megabit, 8 Megabit/Mb = 1 Megabyte/MB).
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1066 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing Voltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM Crucial CT25672BA1067.18FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 7 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8EDF0-AE-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ1 1UD8BAFA-AG-E 1GB DS ELPIDA J5308BASE-AC-E 8 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BAW0-AE-E 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108BABG-DJ-E 7 - ⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8EDF0-AE-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠Hynix HMT112U6AFP8C-G7N0 1GB SS HYNIX H5TQ1G83AFPG7C 7 - ⢠Hynix HYMT112U64ZNF8-G7 1GB SS HYNIX HY5TQ1G831ZNFP-G7 7 - ⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6AFP8C-G7N0 2GB DS HYNIX H5TQ1G83AFPG7C 7 - ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1333 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 D IMM 2 D IMM 4 DI MM A-DA TA AD3133301GOU 1GB SS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠A-DA TA AD31333002GOU 2GB DS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠⢠A-DA TA AD3U1333B2G9-2 2GB DS A-DA TA AD30908C8D-15IG - - ⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1333PB2G7-2P 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1 .6 5-1 .8 5 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD3U1333C4G9-B 4GB DS Hynix H5TQ2G83AFRH9C 1 33 3- 9- 9- 9 -2 4 - ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31333E002G0U 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1. 65 -1. 85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1333PB2G7-3P 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1 .6 5-1 .8 5 ⢠⢠⢠Apacer 78.A1GC6.9L1 2GB DS Apacer AM5D5808DEWSBG 9 - ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1333C9 (Ver2.1) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CM3X1024-1333C9DHX 1GB DS - - - 1.1 ⢠⢠CORSAIR BoxP/N:TWIN3X2048-1333C9 (CM3X1024-1333C9)V er1.1 2GB(2 x 1GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.70 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CM3X2G1333C9 2GB DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR Bo xP/N : TW 3X4G 133 3C9D HX (C M3X2 048 -133 3C9 DHX )V er3 .2 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.70 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1333C9 (Ver2.1) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX8GX3M4A1333C9 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12864BA1339.8FF 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12864BA1339.8SFD 1GB SS MICRON MT 8JF1 286 4A Y - 1G 4D1 - - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT12872BA1339.9FF 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BN1337.16FF(XMP) 2GB DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25664BA1339.16FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25664BA1339.16SFD 2GB DS MICRON D9JNM - - ⢠⢠⢠Crucial CT25672BA1339.18FF 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BA1336.16SFB1 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS NA - 6-6-6-20 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8BA W0-DJ-E 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108BABG-DJ-E 9 - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8BDF0-DJ-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108BDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ10UE8EDF0-DJ-F 1GB SS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BA W0-DJ-E 2GB DS ELPIDA J1108BABG-DJ-E 9 - ⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8BDF0-DJ-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108BDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠ELPIDA EBJ21UE8EDF0-DJ-F 2GB DS ELPIDA J1 108EDSE-DJ-F - - ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10600CL8D-2GBHK 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7T-6GBPK(XMP) 2GB DS - - 7-7-7-18 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7D-4GBPI(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-21 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL7D-4GBRH(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-21 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3 -10 66 6CL 8D- 4G BEC O( XMP ) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.35 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-1 0666C L8D-4 GBHK( XMP ) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3- 106 66CL 8D- 4GBR M(X MP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-10666CL9T-6GBNQ 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5 ⢠⢠â¢
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-13 Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1333 MHz capability (cont.) V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 D IMM 4 DI MM GEIL GG34GB1333C9DC 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS GEIL GL1L128M88BA12N 9-9-9-24 1.3 ⢠⢠GEIL GV34GB1333C7DC 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.5 ⢠⢠Hynix HMT1 12U6BFR8C-H9 1GB SS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFR 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6BFR8C-H9 2GB DS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFR 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Hynix HMT125U6BFR8C-H9 2GB DS Hynix H5TQ1G83BFRH9C 9 - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLFD45F-B8KG9 1GB SS KingMax K FB8 FN GBF -A NX- 15A - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLFE85F-B8KG9 2GB DS KingMax K FB8 FN GBF -A NX- 15A - ⢠⢠⢠KIN GSTO N KVR1333D3N9/1G 1G SS Kingston D1288JELDPGD9U - 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3N9/2G 2GB DS Qimonda IDSH 1G- 03A1 F1C -13H 9 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3E9S/4G 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 - 1.5 ⢠⢠⢠KI NGST ON KVR1333D3N9/4G 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 9 1.5 ⢠⢠MICRON MT8JTF12864AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON 9FF22 D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT8JTF12864AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT9JSF12872AZ-1G4F1 1GB SS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT16JF25664AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT16JTF25664AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON 9FF22 D9KPT 9 - ⢠⢠⢠MICRON MT18JSF25672AZ-1G4F1 2GB DS MICRON D9KPT(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V3GK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3G1333UL V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3G1333L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3P1333L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZX1333L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS NA - 8-8-8 1.6 ⢠⢠⢠PSC AL7F8G73D-DG1 1GB SS PSC A3P1GF3DGF - - ⢠⢠⢠PSC AL8F8G73D-DG1 2GB DS PSC A3P1GF3DGF - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B2873DZ1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B2873EH1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M391B2873DZ1-CH9 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5673DZ1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5673EH1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M391B5673DZ1-CH9 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) 9 - ⢠⢠⢠SAMSUNG M378B5273BH1-CH9 4GB DS SAMSUNG K4B2G0846B-HCH9 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent W1333UX2G8(XMP) 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - 8 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠Asint SL Y3128M8-EDJ 1GB SS Asint DDRIII1208-DJ - - ⢠⢠⢠Asint SL Y3128M8-EDJE 1GB SS ELPIDA J1108BASE-DJ-E - - ⢠⢠Asint SLZ3128M8-EDJ 2GB DS Asint DDRIII1208-DJ - - ⢠⢠⢠Asint SLZ3128M8-EDJE 2GB DS ELPIDA J1108BASE-DJ-E - - ⢠⢠⢠ASUS N/A 1GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠A TP AQ28M64A8BJH9S 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846E - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ28M72D8BJH9S 1GB SS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ56M64B8BJH9S 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D - - ⢠⢠⢠A TP AQ56M72E8BJH9S 2GB DS SAMSUNG K4B1G0846D(ECC) - - ⢠⢠BUFF ALO FSH1333D3G-T3G(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 7-7-7-20 - ⢠⢠⢠EK Memor y EKM324L28BP8-I13 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HA9N-CG 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HC9N-CG 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠Patriot PVT33G1333ELK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVS34G1333LLK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.7 ⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1333ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠Silicon Power SP001GBL TU1333S01 1GB SS NANY A NT5CB128M8AN-CG - - ⢠⢠Silicon Power SP001GBL TU133S02 1GB SS S-POWER I0YT3E0 9 - ⢠Silicon Power SP002GBL TU133S02 2GB DS S-POWER I0YT3E0 9 - ⢠⢠⢠UMAX E41302GP0-73BDB 2GB DS UMAX U2S24D30TP-13 - ⢠â¢
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1600 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM A-DA TA AX3U1600PB1G8-2P 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31600E001GMU 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600PB1G8-3P 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-AG(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600XB2G7-EF(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AD31600F002GMU(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600GB2G9-3G 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65~1.85 ⢠⢠⢠A-DA TA AX3U1600XB2G7-FF(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.75-1.85 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C8D 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C8DV er2.1(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X3G1600C9V er1.1(XMP) 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMD4GX3M2A1600C8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMG4GX3M2A1600C7(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX4GX3M2A1600C9(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C8D 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C8DV er2.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR TR3X6G1600C9V er2.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠CORSAIR CMD8GX3M4A1600C8(XMP) 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠CORSAIR CMX8GX3M4A1600C9(XMP) 8GB(4 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠Crucial BL12864BA1608.8SFB(XMP) 1GB SS - - - 1.8 ⢠⢠⢠Crucial BL25664BN1608.16FF(XMP) 2GB DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-2GBNQ 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.6 ⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-4GBRL 2GB(2 x 1GB) SS - - - 1.6 ⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL7D-4GBRH(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL8D-4GBRM(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.6 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9D-4GBECO(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.35 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL8T -6GBPI(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-21 1.6~1.65 ⢠⢠⢠G.SKILL F3-12800CL9T -6GBNQ 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5-1.6 ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLGD45F-B8MF7(XMP) 1GB SS - - - ⢠⢠⢠KINGMAX FLGE85F-B8MF7(XMP) 2GB DS - - - ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/12GX(XMP) 12GB(3 x 4GB) DS - - - 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/12GX(XMP) 12GB(3 x 4GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C8D3T1K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K2/4G 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - - 1.7~1.9 ⢠KINGSTON KHX1600C9D3K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3OB1600L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3P1600L V4GK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3X16004GK(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7 1.9 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3G1600L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3X1600L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠OCZ OCZ3X1600L V6GK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WP160UX4G8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WP160UX4G9(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WB160UX6G8(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - - - ⢠⢠⢠Super T alent WB160UX6G8(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8 - ⢠⢠⢠Cell Shock CS322271 2GB(2 x 1GB) DS - - 7-7-7-14 1.7-1.9 ⢠⢠EK Memory EKM324L28BP8-I16(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9 - ⢠⢠⢠Elixir M2Y2G64CB8HA9N-DG(XMP) 2GB DS - - - - ⢠⢠⢠Mushkin 996657 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 - ⢠⢠⢠Mushkin 998659(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.5-1.6 ⢠Patriot PVT33G1600ELK 3GB(3 x 1GB) SS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠P ATRIOT PGS34G1600LLKA 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.7 ⢠Patriot PVS34G1600ELK 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.8 ⢠â¢
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-15 Chapter 2 Visit the ASUS website for the latest QVL. Side(s): SS - Single-sided DS - Double-sided DIMM support: ⢠1 DIMM: Supports one (1) module inserted into any slot as Single-channel memory conîguration. ⢠2 DIMMs: Supports two (2) modules inserted into either the blue slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory conîguration. ⢠4 DIMMs: Supports four (4) modules inserted into both the blue and the black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory conîguration. V endor Part No. Size SS/DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM Patriot PVS34G1600LLK(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 1.9 ⢠Patriot PVS34G1600LLKN 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 7-7-7-20 2.0 ⢠Patriot PVT36G1600ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1600ELK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠⢠⢠Patriot PVT36G1600LLK(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠T eam BoxP/N:TXD34096M1600HC6DC-L (TXD32048M1600HC6-L)(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 6-7-6-18 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1600 MHz capability (cont.) M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1800 MHz capability M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-1866 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM KINGSTON KHX1800C9D3T1K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - - 1.65 ⢠V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM CORSAIR TR3X6G1866C9DV er4.1(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3RPR1866C9L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-2000 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM soc ket support (O ptional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM CORSAIR CMG4GX3M2A2000C8(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8-8-8-24 1.65 ⢠G.SKILL F3-16000CL7T-6GBPS(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-8-7-20 1.65 ⢠G.SKILL F3-16000CL9T-6GBPS(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9-9-9-24 1.65 ⢠KINGSTON KHX2000C9D3T1FK3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠KINGSTON KHX2000C9D3T1K3/6GX(XMP) 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 9 1.65 ⢠OCZ OCZ3B2000L V6GK 6GB(3 x 2GB) DS - - 7-8-7 1.65 ⢠M4A89GTD PRO Motherboard Qualiîed V endors Lists (QVL) DDR3-2133 MHz capability V endor Part No. Size SS/ DS Chip Brand Chip NO. Timing V oltage DIMM socket support (Optional) 1 DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM KINGSTON KHX2133C8D3T1K2/4GX(XMP) 4GB(2 x 2GB) DS - - 8 1.65 â¢
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Ensure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM 1. Press the retaining clip outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. 3. Hold the DIMM by both of its ends, then insert the DIMM vertically into the socket. Apply force to both ends of the DIMM simultaneously until the retaining clip snaps back into place, and the DIMM cannot be pushed in any further to ensure proper sitting of the DIMM. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clip outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the DIMM slot key on the socket. A DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îts in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket in the wrong direction to avoid damaging the DIMM. Locked Retaining Clip 3 2 1 Always insert the DIMM into the socket VERTICALL Y to prevent DIMM notch damage. Unlocked retaining clip DIMM notch 1 2 DIMM slot key
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-17 Chapter 2 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following subs ections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card T o install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press îrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.5.2 Conîguring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, conîgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 3 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Ensure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices. IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Redirect to IRQ#9 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 6 14 Reserved 7 15 Reserved 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9 4 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 10 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 1 1 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering* 12 7 Reserved 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCIE x16_1 â â â shared â â â â PCIE x16_2 â â shared â â â â â PCIE x4_1 shared â â â â â â â PCIE x1_1 â shared â â â â â â PCI_1 â â â â shared â â â PCI_2 â â â â â shared â â LAN shared â â â â â â â Onboard 890GX Video Controller â â shared â â â â â Oncip SA T A Controller â â â shared â â â â Onboard JMB 36x SA T A Controller â â shared â â â â â 1394 Controller â â â â â â shared â HD Audio shared â â â â â â â
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-19 Chapter 2 2.5.4 PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.5 PCI Express 2.0 x4 / x1 slots This motherboard supports PCI Express x4 / x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. 2.5.6 PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots This motherboard has two PCI Express 2.0 x16 slots that support PCI Express 2.0 x16 graphics cards complying with the PCI Express speciîcations. Refer to the îgure below for the location of the slots. PCIe 2.0 x16_1 slot (gray , at x 8 link) PCIe 2.0 x4_1 slot PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue, single at x 16 or dual at x8 link) PCI slot 2 PCI slot 1 PCIe 2.0 x1_1 slot
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 ⢠In single VGA card mode, use îrst the PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue) for a PCI Express x16 graphics card to get better performance. ⢠We recommend that you provide sufîcient power when running CrossFireX⢠mode. See page 2-36 for details. ⢠Connect a chassis fan to t he motherboard connector labeled CHA_F AN1/2 when using multiple graphics cards for better thermal environment. See page 2-34 for details. VGA conîguration PCI Express operating mode PCIe x16_1 PCIe x16_2 Single VGA/PCIe card Installed with the bundled VGA switch card* x16 (Recommended for single VGA card) Single VGA/PCIe card N/A x8 (Recommended for single VGA card) Dual VGA/PCIe card x8 x8 * For working at x16 speed on the PCIe 2.0 x16_2 slot (blue), it is necessary to install the bundled VGA switch card to the PCIe 2.0 x16_1 slot (gray).
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-21 Chapter 2 2.6 Jumper Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. T o erase the RTC RAM 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5â10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! ⢠If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard batt ery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery . ⢠Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. ⢠Due to the chipset behavior , AC power of f is required to enable C.P .R. function. Y ou must turn off and on the power supply or unplug and plug the power cord before rebooting the system.
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.7 Onboard switches Onbo ard sw itches allow you to îne-tu ne per form ance w hen wor king o n a bar e or o pen-cas e syst em. This is id eal fo r ov ercloc kers an d game rs who contin ually c hange setting s to e nhance syst em per formanc e. 1. MemOK! switch Installing DIMMs that are incompaible with the motherboard may cause system boot failure, and the DRAM_LED near the MemOK! switch lights continuously . Press and hold the MemOK! switch until the DRAM_LED starts blinking to begin automatic memory compatibility tuning for successful boot. ⢠Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the DRAM_LED. ⢠The DRAM_LED also lights when the DIMM is not properly installed. T urn off the system and reinstall the DIMM before using the MemOK! function. ⢠The MemOK! switch does not function under Windows ® OS environment. ⢠During the tuning process, the system loads and tests failsafe memory settings. It takes about 30 seconds for the system to test one set of failsafe settings. If the test fails, the system reboots and test the next set of failsafe settings. The blinking speed of the DRAM_LED increases, indicating different test processes. ⢠Due to memory tuning requirement, the system automatically reboots when each timing set is tested. If the installed DIMMs still fail to boot after the whole tuning process, the DRAM_LED lights continuously . Replace the DIMMs with ones recommended in the Memory QVL (Qualiîed V endors Lists) in this user manual or on the ASUS website at www.asus.com. ⢠If you turn off the computer and replace DIMMs during the tuning process, the system continues memory tuning after turning on the computer . T o stop memory tuning, turn off the computer and unplug the power cord for about 5â10 seconds. ⢠If your system fail to boot due to BIOS overclocking, press the MemOK! switch to boot and load BIOS default settings. A messgae will appear during POST reminding you that the BIOS has been restored to its default settings. ⢠We recommend that you download and update to the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website at www .asus.com after using the MemOK! function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-23 Chapter 2 2. T urbo Key II switch This switch allows you to auto-tune your CPU to enhance the system performance. ⢠The O2LED5 LED near the T urbo Key II switch lights when the switch setting is turned to Enable . Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the O2LED5 LED. ⢠If you clear the CMOS or load the BIOS setup defaults, the related overclocking items in the BIOS menu follow the current setting of the T urbo Key II switch. ⢠If you change the switch setting to Enable under the OS environment, the T urbo Key II function will be activated after the next system bootup. ⢠Y ou may use the T urboV Auto Tuning, overclock in the BIOS setup program, and enable the T urbo Key II function at the same time. However, the system will use the last setting you have made. For ensuring the system performance, turn the switch setting to Enable when the system is powered off.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. Core Unlocker switch This switch allows you to unlock the extra cores of your CPU. For ensuring the system performance, turn the switch setting to Enable when the system is powered off. ⢠The O2LED4 LED near the Core Unlocker switch lights when the switch setting is turned to Enable . Refer to section 2.9 Onboard LEDs for the exact location of the O2LED4 LED. ⢠Y ou may also press <4> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) or enable the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu to activate the Core Unlocker function. ⢠The system will use the last setting you have made. ⢠If you clear the CMOS or load the BIOS setup defaults, the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu follows the current setting of the Core Unlocker switch.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-25 Chapter 2 2.8 Connectors 2.8.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 7. HDMI Out port*** 2. Optical S/PDIF Out port 8. DVI-D Out pot 3. D-Sub Out port 9. IEEE 1394a port 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 10. Power External SA T A port 5. LAN (RJ-45) port* 1 1. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 6. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6 12. Audio I/O ports** *and **: Refer to the tables on the next page for LAN port and audio port deînitions. ***: Refer to the notes and troubleshooting on HDTV overscaning or underscaling on the next pages. ⢠DO NOT insert a dif ferent connector to the external SA T A port. ⢠T o enable external SA T A device hot-plugging, you have to set the On Board A T A Controller item in the BIOS setting to [Enabled] and install the JMicron JMB36X Controller Driver from the support DVD.
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 ** Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out * LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port Activity Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection Dual display table This table indicates whether the dual display you want to use is supported or not. Dual display output Support Not support DVI D-Sub ⢠HDMI D-Sub ⢠DVI HDMI ⢠Playback of HD DVD and Blu-Ray Discs For better playback quality , we suggest that you follow the system requirements in the suggested list below . Suggested list CPU AMD ® Phenom II X4 955 DIMM DDR3 1333 BIOS setup Frame Buffer Size â 256MB or higher Playback software CyberLink ® PowerDVD 9 File format Best resolution Windows XP Windows V ista Windows 7 Non-protected clips 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p Blu-Ray 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p 1920 x 1080p
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-27 Chapter 2 T roubleshooting on HDTV overscaling or underscaling: If your desktop is extending beyond the viewable display area or the desktop or image is not îlling the entire display area while using the onboard HDMI out port and the HDMI cable, you can resize the desktop appearing on your HDTV screen. T o resize your HDTV desktop: 1. Install AMD Chipset Driver from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Right-click the desktop and select A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center . 3. From the Graphics Settings tree, expand DTV (HDMIâ¢) 1 . 4. Click Scaling Options . 5. Move the Underscan/Overscan slider to adjust the overall size of the display on the HDMI⢠DTV . Using this slider increases or decreases any black borders that may be visible around the outside of the display . The Scaling Options function of the DTV (HDMIâ¢) 1 item in the A TI CA T AL YST Control Center is adjustable only when you are using an HDTV compliance resolution such as 480i, 720i, or 1080i. 6. T o ensure that forcing a custom display mode through the A TI Displays Manager does not create conîicting resolutions, select the Use the scaling values instead of the customized settings when the desktop resolution does not match your DFP resolution check box. 6 5 4 3
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.2 Audio I/O connections Audio I/O ports Connect to Headphone and Mic Connect to Stereo / 2.1-channel Speakers
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-29 Chapter 2 Connect to 4.1 channel Speakers Connect to 7.1 channel Speakers Connect to 5.1 channel Speakers
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.3 Internal connectors Drive jumper setting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE devices. If any device jumper is set as âCable-Selectâ, ensure that all other device jumpers have the same setting. 1. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100/66 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâs IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîgure your device.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-31 Chapter 2 2. AMD ® SB850 Serial A T A Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s connectors (7-pin SA T A 1-6) These connectors are for the Serial A T A 6.0 Gb/s signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives and optical disc drives. If you installed Serial A T A hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 conîguration through the onboard AMD ® SB850 controller . ⢠These connectors are set to Native IDE mode by default. In Native IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the OnChip SA T A T ype item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details. ⢠Y ou must install Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later version before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature is available only if you are using Windows ® XP SP2 or later version. ⢠When using hot-plug and NCQ, set the OnChip SA T A T ype in the BIOS to [AHCI]. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 4. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) This conne ctor is for a n IEEE 1394a port. Conn ect th e IEEE 1394a module cable to this conn ector , the n insta ll the module to a slot op ening at the back o f the syst em cha ssis. Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! The IEEE 1394a module is purchased separately . 3. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The COM module is purchased separately .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-33 Chapter 2 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78; USB910; USB1 112; USB1314) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 13 94 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y ou can connect the front panel USB cable to the ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard if your chassis supports front panel USB ports. The USB module cable is purchased separately .
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 6. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN; 4-pin CHA_F AN1; 3-pin CHA_F AN2; 3-pin PWR_FAN) Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, ensuring that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufîcient air îow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ⢠The CPU_F AN connector supports the CPU fan of maximum 2A (24 W) fan power . ⢠Only the CPU_F AN, CHA_FAN1 and CHA_F AN2 connectors support the ASUS Fan Xpert feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_F AN1 or CHA_FAN2 for better thermal environment.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-35 Chapter 2 7. Digital audio connector (4-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) This connector is for an additional Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) port. Connect the S/PDIF Out m odule cable to t his connector , then install the modul e to a slot open ing at the back of the system chassis. The S/PDIF module is purchased separately . 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We recommend that you connect a high-deînition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâs high-deînition audio capability . ⢠If you want to connect a high-deînition front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel T ype item in the BIOS setup to [HD]; if you want to connect an AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the item to [AC 97]. By default, this connector is set to [HD].
2-36 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 9. A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR; 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ît these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îrmly until the connectors completely ît. ⢠For a fully conîgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V Speciîcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 450 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin EA TX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠We recommend that you use a PSU with higher power output when conîguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠If you are uncertain about the minimum power supply requirement for your system, refer to the Recommended Power Supply W attage Calculator at http://support. asus.com/PowerSupplyCalculator/PSCalculator .aspx?SLanguage=en-us for details. ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 1000W power or above to ensure the system stability .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-37 Chapter 2 ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-of f mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 10. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions.
2-38 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 2.8.4. ASUS Q-Connector (system panel) Use the ASUS Q-Connector to connect/disconnect the chassis front panel cables. T o install the ASUS Q-Connector: 1. Connect the front panel cables to the ASUS Q-Connector . Refer to the labels on the Q-Connector to know the detailed pin deînitions, and then match them to their respective front panel cable labels. The labels on the front panel cables may vary depending on the chassis model. 2. Install the ASUS Q-Connector to the system panel connector , ensuring the orientation matches the labels on the motherboard. 3. The front panel functions are now enabled. The îgure sho ws the Q-Conn ector is prop erly installed on the motherboard. IDE_LED POWER SW RESET SW IDE_LED- IDE_LED PWR Reset Ground Ground
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-39 Chapter 2 2.9 Onboard LEDs 1. Standby Power LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2. DRAM LED DRAM LED checks the DRAM in sequence during motherboard booting process. If an error is found , the LED next to the error device will continue lighting until the problem is solved. This user-friendly design provides an intuitional way to locate the root problem within a second. Y ou may disable the DRAM LED in BIOS. Refer to section 3.9 T ools menu for details.
2-40 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2 3. T urbo Key II LED The T urbo Key II LED lights when the T urbo Key II switch is turned to Enable . 4. Core Unlocker LED The Core Unlocker LED lights when the Core Unclocker switch is turned to Enable . The Core Unlocker LED keeps on lighting even though the ASUS Core Unlocker item in the BIOS menu is set to [Disabled].
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 2-41 Chapter 2 2.10 Starting up for the î¿rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power button. If your monitor complies with the âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or change from orange to green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST . While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see the BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 3. BIOS Beep Description One short beep VGA detected Quick boot set to disabled No keyboard detected One continuous beep followed by two short beeps then a pause (repeated) No memory detected One continuous beep followed by three short beeps No VGA detected One continuous beep followed by four short beeps Hardware component failure 2.11 Turning off the computer While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seco nds puts the system on sleep mode or soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section 3.7 Power menu in Chapter 3 for details.
2-42 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-1 Chapter 3 3.1 Knowing BIOS BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings such as storage device conîguration, overclocking settings, advanced power management, and boot device conîguration that are needed for system startup in the motherboard CMOS. In normal circumstances, the default BIOS settings apply to most conditions to ensure optimum performance. We recommend that you not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances: ⢠An error message appears on the screen during the system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. ⢠Y ou have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or update. 3.2 Updating BIOS The ASUS website publishes the latest BIOS versions to provide enhancements on system stability , compatibility , or performance. However , BIOS updating is potentially risky . If there is no problem using the current version of BIOS, DO NOT manually update the BIOS. Inappropriate BIOS updating may result in the systemâs failure to boot. Carefully follow the instructions of this chapter to update your BIOS if necessary . Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS île for this motherboard. The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard BIOS setup program. 1. ASUS Update: Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment. 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2: Updates the BIOS using a USB îash drive. 3. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility: Restores the BIOS using the motherboard support DVD or a USB îash drive when the BIOS île fails or gets corrupted. 4. ASUS BIOS Updater: Updates and backups the BIOS in DOS environment using the motherboard support DVD and a USB îash disk drive. Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS île to a USB îash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update utility . Inappropriate settings of the BIOS may result to instability or failure to boot. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel . Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3
3-2 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.2.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS île ⢠Download the latest BIOS île from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS île ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet ⢠View the BIOS version information This utility is available in the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support DVD in the optical drive. 2. From the Main menu, click the Ut ilities tab, then c lick Insta ll ASUS U pdat e VX.X X.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. From the Windows ® desktop, click Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet from the drop-down menu, and then click Next.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-3 Chapter 3 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîc, or click Auto Select . Click Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next . Updating the BIOS through a BIOS île T o update the BIOS through a BIOS île: 1. Fom the Windows ® desktop, click Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a île from the dropdown menu, then click Next . M4A89GTD M4A89GTD.ROM Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS île from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update process.
3-4 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to use a bootable îoppy disk or an OS-based utility . Before you start using this utility , download the latest BIOS from the ASUS website at www .asus.com. T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2: 1. Insert the USB îash disk that contains the latest BIOS île to the USB port, and then launch EZ Flash 2 in any of these two ways: ⢠Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. ⢠Enter the BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash 2 and press <Enter> to enable it. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V4.12 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown 2. Press <T ab> to switch between drives until the correct BIOS île is found. When the correct BIOS île is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-5 Chapter 3 3.2.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS île when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can restore a corrupted BIOS île using the motherboard support DVD or a USB îash drive that contains the BIOS île. The BIOS île in the motherboard support DVD may be older than the BIOS île published on the ASUS ofîcial website. If you want to use the newer BIOS île, download the île at support.asus.com and save it to a USB îash drive. Recovering the BIOS T o recover the BIOS: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support DVD to the optical drive, or the USB îash drive containing the BIOS île to the USB port. 3. The utility automatically checks the devices for the BIOS île. When found, the utility reads the BIOS île and starts îashing the corrupted BIOS île. 4. Turn of f the system after the utility completes the updating process and power on again. 5. The system requires you to enter BIOS Setup to recover BIOS setting. T o ensure system compatibility and stability , we recommend that you press <F2> to load default BIOS values. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
3-6 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Booting the system in DOS environment 1. Insert the USB îash drive with the latest BIOS île and BIOS Updater to the USB port. 2. Boot your computer . When the ASUS Logo appears, press <F8> to show the BIOS Boot Device Select Menu . Insert the support DVD into the optical drive and select the optical drive as the boot device. Welcome to FreeDOS (http://www.freedos.org)! C:\>d: D:\> 3. When the Make Disk menu appears, select the FreeDOS command prompt item by pressing the item number . 4. At the FreeDOS prompt, type d: and press <Enter> to switch the disk from Drive C (optical drive) to Drive D (USB îash drive). Please select boot device: â and â to move selection ENTER to select boot device ESC to boot using defaults SATA:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CDROM:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX USB:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Network:XXXXXXXXXXXXX 3.2.4 ASUS BIOS Updater The ASUS BIOS Updater allows you to update BIOS in DOS environment. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS île that you can use as a backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. The succeeding utility screens are for reference only . The actual utility screen displays may not be same as shown. Before updating BIOS 1. Prepare the motherboard support DVD and a USB îash drive in F A T32/16 format and single partition. 2. Download the latest BIOS île and BIOS Updater from the ASUS website at http:// support.asus.com and save them on the USB îash drive. ⢠NTFS is not supported under DOS environment. Do not save the BIOS île and BIOS Updater to a hard disk drive or USB îash drive in NTFS format. ⢠Do not save the BIOS île to a îoppy disk due to low disk capacity . 3. Turn of f the computer and disconnect all SA T A hard disk drives (optional).
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-7 Chapter 3 2. The BIOS Updater backup screen appears indicating the BIOS backup process. When BIOS backup is done, press any key to return to the DOS prompt. ASUSTek BIOS Updater for DOS V1.00b [09/06/22] Current ROM Update ROM Note Saving BIOS: FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown BIOS backup is done! Press any key to continue. D:\>bupdater /oOLDBIOS1.rom Filename Extension Backing up the current BIOS T o backup the current BIOS île using the BIOS Updater Ensure that the USB îash drive is not write-protected and has enough free space to save the île. 1. At the FreeDOS prompt, type bupdater /o[î¿lename] and press <Enter>. The [îlename] is any user-assigned îlename with no more than eight alphanumeric characters for the îlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension.
3-8 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 4. Select Y es and press <Enter>. When BIOS update is done, press <ESC> to exit BIOS Updater . Restart your computer . DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠For BIOS Updater version 1.04 or later , the utility automatically exits to the DOS prompt after updating BIOS. ⢠Ensure to load the BIOS default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit BIOS menu. See Chaper 3 of your motherboard user manual for details. ⢠Ensure to connect all SA T A hard disk drives after updating the BIOS île if you have disconnected them. Updating the BIOS île T o update the BIOS île using BIOS Updater 1. At the FreeDOS prompt, type bupdater /pc /g and press <Enter>. ASUSTek BIOS Updater for DOS V1.00b [09/06/22] Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit M4A89GTD.ROM 2097152 2010-01-11 17:30:48 FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L1605A PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4A89GTD PRO VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown D:\>bupdater /pc /g 2. The BIOS Updater screen appears as below . 3. Press <T ab> to switch between screen îelds and use the <Up/Down/Home/End> keys to select the BIOS île and press <Enter>. BIOS Updater checks the selected BIOS île and prompts you to conîrm BIOS update. Are you sure to update BIOS? Yes No
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-9 Chapter 3 3.3 BIOS setup program A BIOS Setup program is provided for BIOS item modiîcation. When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility . Otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If y ou wis h to e nter Se tup af ter PO ST , r estart the sy stem b y press ing <C trl> <A lt> <Del ete>, or b y pres sing th e rese t butto n on t he sys tem chassi s. Y ou c an a lso re start b y turn ing the syst em of f and then b ack on. Do th is last optio n only if the îrst t wo fai led. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various submenus and select from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS setting, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit menu. See section 3.10 Exit Menu for details. ⢠If the system fails to boot after changing any BIOS setting, try to clear the CMOS and reset the motherboard to the default value. See section 2.6 Jumper for details. 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen 3.3.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîguration Ai T weaker For changing the overclocking settings Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîguration Boot For changing the system boot conîguration T ools For conîguring options for special functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys General help Menu bar Submenu items Conîguration îelds Menu items System Time [13:51:25] System Date [Mon 01/11/2010] Language [English] SATA1 [HD T722 516D LA380 ] SATA2 [Not Detected] SATA3 [ATAPI DVD DH1] SATA4 [Not Detected] SATA5 [Not Detected] SATA6 [Not Detected] Storage Conî¿guration System Information
3-10 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.3.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. The navigation keys may differ from one screen to another . 3.3.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Ai T weaker, Advanced, Power , Boot, T ools, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 3.3.5 Submenu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a submenu. T o display the submenu, select the item and press <Enter>. 3.3.6 Conîguration îelds These îelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conîgurable, you can change the value of the îeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîgurable. A conîgurable îeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îeld, select it and press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 3.3.7 Pop-up window . 3.3.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item and press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîguration options for that item. 3.3.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ît on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 3.3.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] ACPI Version Features [Disabled] ACPI APIC support [ Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. Scroll bar Disabled Enabled Pop-up window
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-1 1 Chapter 3 3.4 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the submenu. Refer to section 3.3.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. 3.4.1 SA T A 1â6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of SA T A devices. There is a separate submenu for each SA T A device. Select a device item and press <Enter> to display the SA T A device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART Monitoring). These values are not user-conîgurable. These items show N/A if no SA T A device is installed in the system. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Date. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [13:51:25] System Date [Mon 01/11/2010] Language [English] SATA1 [HD T722 516D LA380 ] SATA2 [Not Detected] SATA3 [ATAPI DVD DH1] SATA4 [Not Detected] SATA5 [Not Detected] SATA6 [Not Detected] Storage Conî¿guration System Information v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Select the type of device connected to the system. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : HDT722516DLA380 Size : 164.7GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-6 SMART Monitoring:Supported LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer)M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]
3-12 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 T ype [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device installed. [Not Installed] Select this option if no device is installed. [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the appropriate device type. [CDROM] Select this option if you are speciîcally conîguring a CD-ROM drive. [ARMD] Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. This item appears in SA T A 5/SA T A 6 only . LBA/Large Mode [Auto] [Auto] Select [Auto] to enable the LBA mode (Logical Block Addressing mode) if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. [Disabled] Disables this function. Block (Multi-Sector T ransfer) M [Auto] [Auto] When se t to [A uto], the dat a transfer fr om and to the device occur s in multipl e sectors at a time if the device suppo rts multi-sec tor transfer feature. [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. PIO Mode [Auto] [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the PIO (Programmed input/output) modes, which correspond to different data transfer rates. [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] Sets the PIO mode to Mode 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. DMA Mode [Auto] DMA (Direct Memory Access) allows your computer to transfer data to and from the hardware devices installed with much less CPU overhead. The DMA mode consists of SDMA (single-word DMA), MDMA (multi-word DMA), and UDMA (Ultra DMA). Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the DMA mode. SMART Monitoring [Auto] [Auto] Allows automatic selection of the S.M.A.R.T (Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology). [Enabled] Enables the S.M.A.R.T feature. [Disabled] Disables the S.M.A.R.T feature. 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] [Enabled] Sets the controller to combine two 16-bit reads from the hard disk into a single 32-bit double word transfer to the processor . This makes more efîcient use of the PCI bus as fewer transactions are needed for the transfer of a particular amount of data. [Disabled] Disables this function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-13 Chapter 3 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration The Storage Conîguration menu allows you to conîgure your storage devices. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. OnChip SA T A Channel [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard channel SA T A port. [Disabled] Disables the onboard channel SA T A port. The following two items appear only when you set the OnChip SA T A Channel item to [Enabled]. OnChip SA T A T ype [Native IDE] Allows you to set the SA T A conîguration. [Native IDE] Set to [Native IDE] when you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices. [RAID] Set to [RAID] when you want to create a RAID conîguration from the SA T A hard disk drives. [AHCI] Set to [AHCI] when you want the SA T A hard disk drives to use the AHCI (Advanced Host Controller Interface). The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. ⢠When this item is set to [AHCI], the information of the SA T A connectors 1â6 can be seen only under the OS environment or during POST . ⢠For Windows ® XP OS, you have to install the AHCI driver , so that you could use the SA T A connectors 1â6 in AHCI mode under the OS environment. SA T A Port5 - Port6 [Native IDE] Setting this item to [Native IDE] instead of [RAID] or [AHCI] allows the system to recognize the optical dirves connected to the SA T A connectors 5 or 6 when installing OS. If you use a SA T A optical drive to run the OS installation disk, we strongly recommend that you install the optical dirve to the SA T A connectors 5/6 and set them to [Native IDE] mode. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Storage Conî¿guration OnChip SATA Channel [Enabled] OnChip SATA Type [Native IDE] SATA Port5 - Port6 [Native IDE]
3-14 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.4.3 System Information This menu gives y ou an overvie w of t he gen eral syste m speci îcatio ns. T he BIO S au tomati cally dete cts th e BIOS inform ation, CPU sp eciîca tion , and system memory in thi s menu . BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main EC BIOS Version : MBEC-0007 BIOS Information Version : 0109 Build Date: 01/07/10 Processor Type : AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 945 Processor Speed : 3010MHz System Memory Usable Size : 768MB
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-15 Chapter 3 3.5 Ai Tweaker menu The Ai T weaker menu items allow you to conîgure overclocking-related items. Be cautious when changing the settings of the Ai T weaker menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. The conîguration options for this chapter vary depending on the CPU and DIMM model you installed on the motherboard. Scroll down to display the following items: v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Warning: this function belongs to overclock- ing, and it may cause instability. Select a CPU level, and the rest will be auto-adjusted. If you want to adjust more, set Ai Overclock Tuner to Manual after you select a CPU level. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure System Performance Settings CPU Level UP [Auto] ------------------------------------------------- OC Tuner Utility Ai Overclock Tuner [Auto] CPU Ratio [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] CPU/NB Frequency [Auto] HT Link Speed [Auto] DRAM Timing Conî¿guration DRAM Driving Conî¿guration ******* Please key in numbers directly! ******* CPU & NB Voltage Mode [Offset] CPU Offset Voltage 1.308 [Auto] CPU/NB Offset Voltage 1.100 [Auto] CPU VDDA Voltage 2.490 [Auto] DRAM Voltage 1.500 [Auto] HT Voltage 1.196 [Auto] NB Voltage 1.093 [Auto] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. NB 1.8V Voltage 1.950 [Auto] SB Voltage 1.100 [Auto] SidePort Memory Voltage 1.500 [Auto] *********************************************** CPU Load-Line Calibration [Auto] CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration [Auto] CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] ************** GFX Overclocking *************** Internal Graphics Mode [UMA SIDEPORT] UMA Frame Buffer Size [Auto] SIDEPORT Clock Speed [DDR3-1333MHz] GFX Engine Clock Override [Disabled] ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 3.5.1 CPU Level UP [Auto] Allows you to select a CPU level, and the related parameters will be automatically adjusted according to the selected CPU level. If you want to manually conîgure the settings in detail, set Ai Overclock T uner to [Manual] after selecting a CPU level. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Phenom II-955] [Phenom II-3.4G] [Phenom II-3.6G] ⢠The conîguration options vary depending on the CPU model you install on the motherboard. ⢠The CPU Level UP function support depends on CPU types.
3-16 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 The conîguration options for the following sub-items vary depending on the CPU/DIMMs you install on the motherboard. OC From CPU Level UP [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock Tuner item to [Manual] and allows you to select a CPU level. The related parameters will be automatically adjusted according to the selected CPU level. CPU Bus Frequency [XXX] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the CPU Bus frequency . Y ou can also key in the desired frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 600. PCIE Frequency [XXX] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the PCIE frequency . Y ou can also key in the desired value using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 150. DRAM O.C. Proîle [DDR3-1600MHz] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [D.O.C.P .] and allows you to select a DRAM O.C. proîle, which applies different settings to DRAM frequency , DRAM timing and DRAM voltage. Conîguration options: [DDR3-1600MHz] [DDR3-1800MHz] [DDR3-1866MHz] Proîle Info : xxxxMHzâx-x-x-xx This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [D.O.C.P .] and displays the current DRAM proîle information. The proîle information varies according to the DRAM O.C. Proîle youâve selected. 3.5.3 Ai Overclock T uner [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency . Select any of these preset overclocking conîguration options: Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. D.O.C.P Allows you to select a DRAM O.C. proîle, and the related parameters will be adjusted automatically . CPU Level UP Allows you to select a CPU level, and the related parameters will be adjusted automatically . 3.5.2 OC T uner Utility OC T uner utility automatically overclocks the frequency and voltage of the CPU and DRAM. Press <Enter> to start auto tuning. It takes around îve minutes, and the system will reboot for several times until auto tuning is completed.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-17 Chapter 3 3.5.4 CPU Ratio [Auto] Allows you to set the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the ratio. The valid value ranges vary according to your CPU model. 3.5.5 DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR3 operating frequency . The conîguration options vary with the CPU Bus Frequency item settings. Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. 3.5.6 CPU/NB Frequency [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU/NB frequency . Conîguration options: [Auto] [800MHz] [1000MHz] [1200MHz] [1400MHz] [1600MHz] [1800MHz] [2000MHz] 3.5.7 HT Link Speed [Auto] Allows you to select the HyperT ransport link speed. Conîguration options: [Auto] [200MHz] [400MHz] [600MHz] [800MHz] [1000MHz] [1200MHz] [1400MHz] [1600MHz] [1800MHz] [2000MHz] 3.5.8 DRAM Timing Conîguration The conîguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. DRAM CAS# Latency [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# PRE Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] â [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# ACT Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [15 CLK] â [30 CLK] DRAM READ to PRE Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM Row Cycle Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1 1 CLK] â [41 CLK]
3-18 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 DRAM WRITE Recovery Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] [8 CLK] [10 CLK] [12 CLK] DRAM RAS# to RAS# Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM READ to WRITE Delay [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [17 CLK] DRAM WRITE to READ Delay(DD) [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [2 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM WRITE to READ Delay(SD) [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [4 CLK] [5 CLK] [6 CLK] [7 CLK] DRAM WRITE to WRITE Timing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM READ to READ Timing [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [3 CLK] â [10 CLK] DRAM REF Cycle Time [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [90ns] [1 10ns] [160ns] [300ns] [350ns] DRAM Refresh Rate [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Every 7.8ms] [Every 3.9ms] DRAM Command Rate [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1T] [2T] 3.5.9 DRAM Driving Conîguration The conîguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. CKE drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] CS/ODT drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] ADDR/CMD drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] [2x] MEMCLK drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x]
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-19 Chapter 3 Data drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] DQS drive strength [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [0.75x] [1x] [1.25x] [1.5x] Processor ODT [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [240 ohms /- 20%] [120 ohms /- 20%] [60 ohms /- 20%] Some of the following items are adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . 3.5.10 CPU & NB V oltage Mode [Offset] Allows you to set the CPU & CPU/NB V oltage Mode. Different sub-items appear according to the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item setting. Conîguration options: [Offset] [Manual] CPU Offset V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Offset] and allows you to set the CPU Offset voltage. The values range from 0.003125V to 0.700000V with a 0.003125V interval. CPU/NB Offset V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Offset] and allows you to set the CPU/NB Offset voltage. The values range from 0.003125 V to 0.700000V with a 0.003125V interval. CPU V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Manual] and allows you to set a îxed CPU voltage. CPU/NB V oltage [Auto] This item appears only when you set the CPU & NB V oltage Mode item to [Manual] and allows you to set a îxed CPU/NB voltage. 3.5.1 1 CPU VDDA V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU VDDA voltage. The values range from 2.20000V to 2.90000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.12 DRAM V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM voltage. The values range from 1.20000V to 2.50000V with a 0.00625V interval.
3-20 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.5.18 CPU Load-Line Calibration [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU Load-Line mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3.5.19 CPU/NB Load-Line Calibration [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU/NB Load-Line mode. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3.5.20 CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] [Auto] Automatic conîguration. [Disabled] Enhances the CPU overclocking ability . [Enabled] Sets to [Enabled] for EMI control. 3.5.21 PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] [Auto] Automatic conîguration. [Disabled] Enhances the PCIE overclocking ability . [Enabled] Sets to [Enabled] for EMI control. 3.5.13 HT V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the HyperT ransport voltage. The values range from 0.80000V to 1.40000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.14 NB V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Northbridge voltage. The values range from 0.80000V to 2.00000V with a 0.00625V interval. 3.5.15 NB 1.8V V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Northbridge 1.8V voltage. The values range from 1.80V to 2.10V with a 0.05V interval. 3.5.16 SB V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Southbridge voltage. The values range from 1.10V to 1.40V with a 0.05V interval. 3.5.17 SidePort Memory V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the SidePort memory voltage. The values range from 1.50V to 1.80V with a 0.10V interval. ⢠Setting the above voltages to a high level may damage the CPU, memory module, and chipset permanently . Proceed with caution. ⢠The system may require a better cooling system to work stably under high voltage settings.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-21 Chapter 3 3.5.22 Internal Graphics Mode [UMA SIDEPORT] Allows you to select the Internal Graphics Mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [UMA] [SIDEPORT] [UMA SIDEPOR T] UMA Frame Buffer Size [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA] or [UMA SIDEPORT]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [32MB] [64MB] [128MB] [256MB] [512MB] SIDEPORT Clock Speed [DDR3-1333MHz] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [SIDEPORT] or [UMA SIDEPORT]. Be cautious when setting the SIDEPOR T clock speed. Improper overclock setting may cause the system unstable or hardware damage. 3.5.23 GFX Engine Clock Override [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the GFX Engine Clock Override function. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] GFX Engine Clock [500] This item appears only when you set the GFX Engine Clock Override item to [Enabled] and allows you to set the GFX Engine Clock. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value, or key in the desired value using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key .
3-22 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Be cautious when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îeld values can cause the system to malfunction. 3.6 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Conî¿gure CPU. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration USB Conî¿guration PCIPnP 3.6.1 CPU Conîguration The items in this menu show th e CPU- relate d in format ion tha t the BIOS au tomati cally d etects . The items shown in this screen may be different due to the CPU you installed. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced CPU Conî¿guration AGESA Version:3.5.4.0 AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 945 Processor Revision: C2 Cache L1: 512KB Cache L2: 2048KB Cache L3: 6MB Speed : 3010MHz, NB Clk: 2000MHz uCode Patch Level : 0x1000086 Microcode Updation [Enabled] Secure Virtual Machine Mode [Enabled] CoolânâQuiet [Enabled] ASUS Core Unlocker [Disabled] C1E Support [Enabled] Options Enabled Disabled Microcode Updation [Enabled] [Enabled] Allows the system to update the Microcode automatically , enhancing system performance. [Disabled] Disables this function. Secure Virtual Machine Mode [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the AMD Secure Virtual Machine mode. [Disabled] Disables this function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-23 Chapter 3 CoolânâQuiet [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the AMD CoolânâQuiet function. [Disabled] Disables this function. ASUS Core Unlocker [Disabled] [Enabled] Enables the ASUS Core Unlocker to get the full computing power of the processor . [Disabled] Disables this function. C1E Support [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the C1E support function. This item should be enabled in order to enable the Enhanced Halt Sate. [Disabled] Disables this function. NorthBridge Chipset Conîguration 3.6.2 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Advanced Chipset Settings NorthBridge Conî¿guration 890GX Conî¿guration Options for NB BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced NorthBridge Chipset Conî¿guration DRAM Controller Conî¿guration ECC Conî¿guration DRAM Controller Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced DRAM Controller Conî¿guration Channel Interleaving [XOR of Address bit] MemClk Tristate C3/ATLVID [Disabled] Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] DCT Unganged Mode [Always] Power Down Enable [Disabled] Channel Interleaving [XOR of Address bit] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Address bits 6] [Address bits 12] [XOR of Address bits [20:16, 6]] [XOR of Address bits [20:16, 9]] MemClk T ristate C3/A TL VID [Disabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enable Channel Memory Interleaving
3-24 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 ECC Conîguration ECC Mode [Disabled] Disables or sets the DRAM ECC mode that allows the hardware to report and correct memory errors. [Disabled] Disables the DRAM ECC mode. [Basic] Set to [Basic] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [Good] Set to [Good] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [Super] Set to [Super] to adjust the DRAM BG Scrub sub-item manually . [Max] Set to [Max] to adjust ECC mode automatically . [User] Set to [User] to adjust all the subitems manually . Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DCT Unganged Mode [Always] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Always] Power Down Enable [Disabled] Enables or disables the DDR power down mode. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power Down Mode [Channel] This item appears only when you enable the previous item and allows you to set the DDR power down mode. Conîguration options: [Channel] [Chip Select] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ECC Conî¿guration ECC Mode [Disabled] DRAM ECC Enable [Disabled] DRAM SCRUB REDIRECT [Disabled] 4-Bit ECC Mode [Disabled] DRAM BG Scrub [Disabled] Data Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] L2 Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] L3 Cache BG Scrub [Disabled] Set the level of ECC protection. Note: The âSuperâ ECC mode dynamically sets the DRAM scrub rate so all of memory is scrubbed in 8 hours.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-25 Chapter 3 890GX Chipset Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced 890GX Chipset Conî¿guration Internal Graphics Conî¿guration Primary Video Controller [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] Internal Graphics Conf UMA-SP Interleave Mode [Auto] This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA SIDEPORT]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Coarse] [Fine] The following îve items appear only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [SIDEPORT] or [UMA SIDEPOR T]. SP Power Management [Dynamic CMD] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Dynamic CKE] [Dynamic CMD] [Dynamic CLK] [Disable] SP NB T ermination [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP Memory T ermination [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP CMD Hold [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] SP DA T A Hold [Auto] Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disable] [Enabled] Surround View [Auto] If you set the PCI Express device as the primary display and enable this item, you may use the internal graphics as the secondary display . This item appears only when you set the Internal Graphics Mode item to [UMA], [SIDEPORT], or [UMA SIDEPOR T]. Conîguration options: [Auto] [Enabled] [Disabled] When set to [Auto], only the primary display could be activated. Internal Graphics Conîguration BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Internal Graphics Conî¿guration UMA-SP Interleave Mode [Auto] SP Power Management [Dynamic CMD] SP NB Termination [Auto] SP Memory Termination [Auto] SP CMD Holde [Auto] SP DATA Hold [Auto] Surround View [Auto] FB Location [Above 4G] AMD 880 HD Audio [Enable] Auto - Fine interleave Ratio/Size selected based on system conî¿guration (HT Freq, number of memory channel).
3-26 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 FB Location [Above 4G] Allows you to select the FB Location. Conîguration options: [Below 4G] [Above 4G] AMD 880 HD Audio [Enabled] Allows you to disable or enable the AMD 880 HD Audio. Conîguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Primary Video Controller [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] Allows you to select the graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. Conîguration options: [GFX0-GPP-IGFX-PCI] [GPP-GFX0-IGFX-PCI] [PCI-GFX0-GPP-IGFX] [IGFX-GFX0-GPP-PCI] 3.6.3 Onboard Devices Conîguration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conîguration options: [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port1 Mode [Normal] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 mode. Conîguration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] Onboard LAN [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard LAN controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Enabled]. [Enabled] Enables the onboard Gigabit LAN Boot ROM. [Disabled] Disables the LAN Boot ROM. Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard IEEE 1394a controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . Onboard Devices Conî¿guration Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Mode [Normal] Onboard LAN [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Azalia Device [Enabled] Front Panel Type [HD] SPDIF OUT Type [SPDIF] On Board ATA Controller [Enabled] On Board ATA Controller ROM [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced Allows BIOS to select Serial Port1 Base Addresses.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-27 Chapter 3 HD Audio Azalia Device [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the HD Audio controller . Conîguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] The following three items appear only when you set the HD Audio Azalia Device item to [Enabled] or [Auto]. Front Panel T ype [HD] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâ97 or high- deînition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. [AC 97] Sets the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâ97 [HD] Sets the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to high deînition audio. SPDIF OUT T ype [SPDIF] If your graphics card has HDMI output and needs to use SPDIF signal from the SPDIF_Out header , you need to set to HDMI for HDMI audio output. [SPDIF] Sets to [SPDIF Output] for SPDIF audio output. [HDMI] Sets to [HDMI Output] for HDMI audio output. On Board A T A Controller [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard A T A controller . [Disabled] Disables the controller . On Board A T A Controller ROM [Enabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Enabled]. [Enabled] Enables the onboard A T A controller ROM. [Disabled] Disables the onboard A T A controller ROM. 3.6.4 USB Conîguration The items in this menu allow you to change the USB-related features. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. USB Conî¿guration Module Version - 2.24.5-13.4 USB Devices Enabled: 2 Hubs USB Support [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced The USB Devices Enabled item shows the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None.
3-28 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.6.5 PCIPnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. Plug And Play O/S [No] [Y es] W hen se t to [Y es] and if yo u insta ll a P lug and Play operati ng sys tem, t he oper ating system conîgu res the Plug and Pl ay d evices not re quired for bo ot. [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîgures all the devices in the system. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Support [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the USB Host Controllers. [Disabled] Disables the controllers. The following items appear only when you set USB Support to [Enabled]. Legacy USB Support [Auto] [Auto] Allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. [Enabled] Enables the support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). [Disabled] Disables the function. USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] [FullSpeed] Sets the USB 2.0 controller mode to FullSpeed (12 Mbps). [HiSpeed] Sets the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps). BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] [Ena bled] En ables the sup port f or oper ating system s wi thout an EHCI hand- of f feat ure. [Disabled] Disables the function.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-29 Chapter 3 3.7 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. 3.7.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. [Auto] The system automatically conîgures the ACPI suspend mode. [S1 (POS) only] Sets the ACPI suspend mode to S1/POS (Power On Suspend). [S3 only] Sets the ACPI suspend mode to S3/STR (Suspend T o RAM). 3.7.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. [No] The system will not invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. [Y es] The system invokes VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. 3.7.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] [Disabled] The system will not add additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciîcations. [Enabled] The system adds additional tables as per ACPI 2.0 speciîcations. 3.7.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] [Disabled] The system disables the Advanced Conîguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). [Enabled] The ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor
3-30 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 EuP Ready [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Energy Using Products (EuP) Ready function. [Enabled] Allows BIOS to switch off some power at S5 state to get system ready for the EuP requirement. When set to [Enabled], power for WOL, WO_USB, audio and onboard LEDs will be switched off at S5 state. Restore On AC Power Loss [Disabled] [Power On] The system goes into on state after an AC power loss. [Disabled] The system goes into off state after an AC power loss. [Last State] The system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Power On By PCI/PCIE Device [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI/PCIE devices. [Enabled] Allows you to turn on the system through a PCI/PCIE LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Power On By PS/2 Devoces [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Power On by a PS/2 devices. [Enabled] Enables the Power On by a PS/2 devices. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Power On By Ring [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables to power up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. [Enabled] The computer could be powered up when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îrst try . Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables RTC to generate a wake event. [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], the items RTC Alarm Date (Days) and System Time will become user-conîgurable with set values. 3.7.5 APM Conîguration APM Conî¿guration EuP Ready [Disabled] Restore on AC Power Loss [Disabled] Power On By PCI/PCIE Device [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Devices [Disabled] Power On By Ring [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-31 Chapter 3 3.7.6 Hardware Monitor CPU T emperature(PECI) / MB T emperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU and motherboard temperatures. Select Ignored if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Chassis Fan / Chassis Fan 2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, chassis, and power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îeld shows N/A . Select Ignored if you do not wish to display the detected speed. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select Ignored if you do not want to detect this item. CPU Q-Fan Function [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables the CPU Q-Fan control feature. [Enabled] Enables the CPU Q-Fan control feature. The following two items appear only when you set CPU Q-Fan Function to [Enabled]. CPU Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] A warning message will appear to remind you that the CPU fan speed is lower than the selected value. Conîguration options: [500RPM] [400RPM] [300RPM] [200RPM] [100RPM] [Ignored] Select Fan T ype: [PWR Fan] [PWR Fan] Sets to [PWR Fan] when using a 4-pin CPU fan. [DC Fan] Sets to [DC Fan] when using a 3-pin CPU fan. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power CPU Temperature ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [35ºC/95ºF] MB Temperature [34ºC/93ºF] CPU Fan Speed [3590RPM] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.040V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.008V] 5V Voltage [ 4.776V] 12V Voltage [11.648V] CPU Q-Fan Function [Enabled] CPU Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] Select Fan Type : [PWR Fan] CPU Q-Fan Mode [Optimal] Chassis Q-Fan Function [Disabled]
3-32 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 CPU Q-Fan Mode [Optimal] [Performance] Sets to [Performance] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. [Optimal] Sets to [Optimal] to make the CPU fan automatically adjust depending on the CPU temperature. [Silent] Sets to [Silent] to minimize the fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation.] [Manual] Sets to [Manual] to assign detailed fan speed control parameters. The following four items appear only when you set CPU Q-Fan Mode to [Manual]. CPU Upper T emperature [70ºC/158ºF] Sets the upper limit of the CPU temperature. Conîguration options: [30ºC/86ºF] [40ºC/104ºF] [50ºC/122ºF] [60ºC/140ºF] [70ºC/158ºF] [80ºC/176ºF] [90ºC/194ºF] CPU Fan Max. Duty Cycle [100%] Sets the maximum CPU fan duty cycle. When the CPU temperature reaches the upper limit, the CPU fan will operate at the maximum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] CPU Lower T emperature [20ºC/68ºF] Displays the lower limit of the CPU temperature. CPU Fan Min. Duty Cycle [20%] Sets the minimum CPU fan duty cycle. When the CPU temperature is under 20ºC/68ºF , the CPU fan will operate at the minimum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [00%] [10%] [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] Chassis Q-Fan Mode [Disabled] [Disabled] Disables the Chassis Q-Fan control feature. [Enabled] Enables the Chassis Q-Fan control feature. The following item appears only when you set Chassis Q-Fan Mode to [Enabled]. Chassis Fan Speed Low Limit [200 RPM] A warning message will appear to remind you that the chassis fan speed is lower than the selected value. Conîguration options: [500RPM] [400RPM] [300RPM] [200RPM] [100RPM] [Ignored] Chassis Q-Fan Mode [Silent] [Performance] Sets to [Performance] to achieve maximum chassis fan speed. [Optimal] Sets to [Optimal] to make the chassis fan automatically adjust depending on the chassis temperature. [Silent] Sets to [Silent] to minimize fan speed for quiet chassis fan operation. [Manual] Sets to [Manual] to assign detailed fan speed control parameters.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-33 Chapter 3 3.8 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. 3.8.1 Boot Device Priority v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Speciî¿es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. A virtual îoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable Dev.] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot The following four items appear only when you set Chassi Q-Fan Mode to [Manual]. Upper T emperature [70ºC/158ºF] Sets the upper limit of the system temperature. Conîguration options: [30/86ºF] [40ºC/104ºF] [50ºC/122ºF] [60ºC/140ºF] [70ºC/158ºF] [80ºC/176ºF] [90ºC/194ºF] Chassis Fan Max. Duty Cycle [100%] Sets the maximum chassis fan duty cycle. When the system temperature reaches the upper limit, the chassis fan will operate at the maximum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%] Lower T emperature [20ºC/68ºF] Displays the lower limit of the system temperature. Chassis Fan Min. Duty Cycle [20%] Sets the minimum chassis fan duty cycle. When the system temperature is under 20ºC/68ºF , the chassis fan will operate at the minimum duty cycle. Conîguration options: [00%] [10%] [20%] [30%] [40%] [50%] [60%] [70%] [80%] [90%] [100%]
3-34 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 1st â xxth Boot Device [Removable Dev .] Thes e item s speci fy the boot d evice priori ty s equenc e from the av ailable devic es. T he num ber of d evice items t hat ap pears o n the screen dep ends o n the n umber of devi ces in stalled in th e syst em. Co nîgurat ion op tions: [Remov able D ev .] [ Hard D rive ] [A T API CD -ROM] [Disabl ed] ⢠T o selec t the b oot dev ice during syst em start up, pre ss <F8> whe n ASUS Lo go a ppears. ⢠T o access Windows OS in Safe Mode, do any of the following: - Press <F5> when ASUS Logo appears. - Press <F8> after POST . 3.8.2 Boot Settings Conîguration Quick Boot [Enabled] [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. [Enabled] When set to [Enabled], BIOS skips some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. Full Screen Logo [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the full screen logo display feature. [Disabled] Disables the full screen logo display feature. Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo 2⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] [Force BIOS] The third-party ROM messages will be forced to display during the boot sequence. [Keep Current] The third-party ROM messages will be displayed only if the third-party manufacturer had set the add-on device to do so. Bootup Num-Lock [On] [Off] Sets the power-on state of the NumLock to [Off]. [On] Sets the power-on state of the NumLock to [On]. W ait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables this function. [Enabled] The system waits for the <F1> key to be pressed when error occurs. Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] [Disabled] Disables this function. [Enabled] The system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-35 Chapter 3 3.8.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item and press <Enter> to display the conîguration options. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, key in a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message Password Installed appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message Password Uninstalled appears. If you have forgotten your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 2.6 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Passward BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. [No Access] Prevents user access to the Setup utility . [View Only] Allows access but does not allow change to any îeld. [Limited] Allows changes only to selected îelds, such as Date and T ime. [Full Access] Allows viewing and changing all the îelds in the Setup utility .
3-36 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conîrm the password when prompted. The message Password Installed appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] [Setup] BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . [Always] BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-37 Chapter 3 3.9 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the submenu. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit ASUS EZ Flash 2 Express Gate [Auto] Enter OS Timer [10 Seconds] Reset User Data [No] ASUS O.C. Proî¿le AI NET 2 POST State LEDs [Enabled] 3.9.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Y es] or [No], then press <Enter> to conîrm your choice. For more details, refer to section 3.2.2 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility . 3.9.2 Express Gate [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Express Gate feature. The ASUS Express Gate feature is a unique instant-on environment that provides quick access to the Internet browser and Skype. Conîguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] [Auto] Enter OS Timer [10 Seconds] Sets countdown duration that the system waits at the Express Gateâs îrst screen before starting Windows or other installed OS. Choose [Prompt User] to stay at the îrst screen of Express Gate for user action. Conîguration options: [Prompt User] [1 second] [3 seconds] [5 seconds] [10 seconds] [15 seconds] [20 seconds] [30 seconds] Reset User Data [No] Allows you to clear Express Gateâs user data. [Reset] When setting this item to [Reset], ensure that you save the setting to the BIOS so that the user data will be cleared the next time you enter the Express Gate. User data includes the Express Gateâs settings as well as any personal information stored by the web browser such as bookmarks, cookies, browsing history . This is useful in the rare case where corrupt settings prevent the Express Gate environment from launching properly .
3-38 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.9.3 ASUS O.C. Proîle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. Add Y our CMOS Proîle Allows you to save the current BIOS île to the BIOS Flash. In the Name sub-item, key in your proîle name and press <Enter>, and then choose a proîle number to save your CMOS settings in the Save to sub-item. Load CMOS Proîles. Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the île. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools Typing your proî¿le name, [0-9][a-z][A-Z] are acceptable. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 3 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 4 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 5 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 6 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 7 Status : Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 8 Status : Not Installed Status: Add Your CMOS Proî¿le. Name: [Default-Proî¿le] Save To: [Uninstalled] Load CMOS Proî¿les. Load From: [Blank] Start O.C. Proî¿le [No] Sets to [No] to disable the Reset User Data function when entering the Express Gate. The îrst time wizard will run again when you enter the Express Gate environment after clearing its settings.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 3-39 Chapter 3 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [Tab] Switch [V] Drive Info [Up/Down/Home/End] Move [B] Backup [Esc] Exit PATH: A:\ BOARD: M4 A89 GTD PR O VER: 0109 DATE: 01/07/2010 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V2.12 ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure! ⢠We rec ommend that you up date the BIO S île o nly com ing from th e sa me memor y/CPU conî guratio n an d BIOS v ersion. ⢠Only the CMO île can be loaded. 3.9.4 AI NET 2 Check Realtek LAN cable [Disabled] [Disabled] BIOS will not check the Realtek LAN cable during the Power-On Self-T est (POST). [Ena bled] BI OS che cks the Realt ek LAN cable during the Power -On Sel f-T est ( POST). 3.9.5 POST State LEDs [Enabled] [Enabled] Enables the onboard DRAM_LED. [Disabled] Disables this function. AI NET 2 Pair Status Length Check Realtek LAN cable [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools Start O.C. Proîle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility .
3-40 Chapter 3: BIOS setup Chapter 3 3.10 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are înished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîrmation window appears. Select Ok to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîrmation appears. Select Ok to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîrmation window appears. Select Ok to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2010, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. ââ Select Screen ââ Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-1 Chapter 4 If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. 4.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows ® XP/ 64-bit XP/ Vista / 64-bit V ista / 7 / 64-bit 7 operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 4.2 Support DVD information The support DVD that comes with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Ensure that you install the Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . The contents of the support DVD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for updates. Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.2.1 Running the support DVD Place the support DVD into the optical drive. The DVD automatically displays the Highlights menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click each menu tab and select the items you want to install. The Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to use the devices. The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. The Make Disk menu contains items to create the RAID/AHCI driver disk. The Manual menu contains the list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Click an icon to display DVD/ motherboard information Click an item to install Click the Highlights tab to display the software information Click to obtain the corresponding software manuals
4-2 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.2.2 Obtaining the software manuals The software manuals are included in the support DVD. Follow the instructions below to get the necessary software manuals. The software manual îles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe ® Acrobat ® Reader from the Utilities menu before opening the îles. The screenshots in this section are for reference only . The actual software manuals containing in the support DVD vary by models. 1. Click the Manual tab. Click ASUS Motherboard Utility Guide from the manual list on the left. 2. The Manual folder of the support DVD appears. Double-click the folder of your selected software. 3. Some software manuals are provided in different languages. Double-click the language to show the software manual.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-3 Chapter 4 4.3.1 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computerâs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Launching PC Probe II 1. Install PC Probe II from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Launch PC Probe II by clicking Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. 3. The PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows ® notiîcation area. Click this icon to close or restore the application. PC Probe II main window Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. Button Function Opens the Conîguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application 4.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support DVD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme île that came with the software application for more information.
4-4 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.2 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch several ASUS utilities easily . Launching AI Suite 1. Install AI Suite from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Launch AI Suite by clicking Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx. xx . The AI Suite main window appears. 3. The AI Suite icon appears in the Windows ® notiîcation area. If you minimize the application main window , click this icon to restore the window . Using AI Suite Click each utility button to launch the utility , or click the Normal button to restore system default settings. Click to launch each utility Click to restore default settings Click to open the monitor window that displays system information such as CPU temperature, CPU voltage, fan speed, and CPU/FSB frequency ⢠The screenshots in this section are for reference only . The actual utility buttons vary by models. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-5 Chapter 4 4.3.3 ASUS Fan Xpert Asus Fa n X pert al lows yo u to ad jus t bo th the CPU an d ch ass is f an spe eds acc ordi ng to diffe rent am bien t t emp erat ure s an d y our PCâ s s yste m l oadi ng. The vari ous fa n pr oîl es o ffer îexi ble co ntro ls of f an spee ds to achi eve a q uie t a nd c ool sys tem en viro nme nt. Launching Fan Xpert Afte r i nst alli ng AI Sui te from th e m othe rbo ard sup por t DV D, laun ch Fan Xpe rt by d oub le- clic kin g t he A I S uite tr ay icon an d th en clic kin g t he F an Xper t b utt on on the AI Su ite main wi ndo w . Using Fan Xpert Fan proîles ⢠Disable: Select this mode to disable the Fan Xpert function. ⢠Performance: This mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect ⢠Optimal: This mode adjusts the CPU fan speed with the ambient temperature. ⢠Silent: This mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation. ⢠Manual: This mode allows you to change the CPU fan proîle under certain limitation. Displays the current CPU/MB temperature and the fan speeds Click to cancel the settings and exit the Fan Xpert utility Click to select a fan type Click to select a fan proîle Click to apply the settings
4-6 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.4 ASUS EPU ASUS EPU is an energy-efîcient tool that provides you with a total system power-saving solution. It detects the current computer loading and intelligently adjusts the power in real-time. With auto phase switching for components, the EPU automatically provides the most appropriate power usage via intelligent acceleration and overclocking. ASUS EPU provides you with these modes to choose from: ⢠Auto Mode ⢠High Performance Mode When you select A uto Mode , the system shifts modes automatically according to the current system status. Y ou can also conîgure advanced settings for each mode. Launching EPU After installing EPU from the motherboard support DVD, double-click the EPU tray icon to launch the program. EPU main menu ⢠Max. Power Saving Mode ⢠EPU supports GPU power saving solution when you install the GPU Boost driver from the support DVD and set EPU to Auto or M aximum Power Saving Mode. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. Displays the following message if no VGA power saving engine is detected. GPU energy saving status GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the support DVD.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-7 Chapter 4 4.3.5 ASUS Express Gate ASUS Express Gate is an ASUS exclusive OS that provides you with quick access to the Internet and key applications before entering the Windows ® OS. Notices about ASUS Express Gate ⢠Ensure to install ASUS Express Gate from the motherboard support DVD before use. ⢠ASUS Express Gate does not support SA T A devices in RAID mode. See chapter 3 for BIOS setup details. ⢠Currently , ASUS Express Gate does not support SA T A 6Gb/s devices. Please visit http://support.asus.com for future Express Gate updates. ⢠ASUS Express Gate supports île uploading from ODD and USB drives and downloading to USB drives only . ⢠ASUS Express Gate supports installation on SA T A HDDs, USB HDDs and Flash drives with at least 1.2GB of available disk space. When installed on USB HDDs or Flash drives, connect the drive to the prior USB port (for example, USB port 1) before turning on the computer to speed the boot-up time. ⢠The display aspect of ASUS Express Gate can be affected due to different monitor speciîcations. Please adjust the screen resolution using Express Gate Conîguration Panel. ⢠Installation of at least 1GB system memory is recommended for better performance. The First Screen Express Gateâs îrst screen appears within a few seconds after you power on the computer . ⢠T o enter the motherboard BIOS setup program, click Exit on the Express Gate First Screen, and then press the <Del> key during POST . ⢠See the software manual in the bundled motherboard support DVD or click in the Express Gate environment for detailed software instructions. Click any of the application icons to enter Express Gate environment and launch the selected application T urn off the computer Click to immediately enter existing OS, or it will automatically continue booting to existing OS when the timer above the Exit icon counts down to zero (0).
4-8 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.3.6 Audio conîgurations The Realtek ® audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Detection function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The CODEC also includes the Realtek ® proprietary UAJ ® (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek ® Audio Driver from the support CD/DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will înd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar. Double- click on the icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager A. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows ® Vista⢠Control settings window Conîguration option tabs Information button Exit button Minimize button Device advanced settings Connector settings Analog and digital connector status Set default device button Control settings window Conîguration options Information button Exit button Minimize button B. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows XP
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-9 Chapter 4 4.3.7 ASUS GPU Boost ASUS GPU Boost allows you to overclock the integrated GPU in WIndows ® environment and takes effect in real-time without exiting and rebooting the OS. Refer to the CPU documentation before adjusting the integrated GPU voltage settings. Setting a high voltage may damage the integrated GPU permanently , and setting a low voltage may make the system unstable. ⢠ASUS GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. ⢠For system stability , all changes made in ASUS GPU Boost will not be saved to BIOS settings and will not be kept on the next system boot. Use the Save Proîle function to save your customized overclocking settings and manually load the proîle after Windows starts. ⢠When GPU Boost is enabled, ASUS EPU will be set to High Performance mode automatically . T o launch ASUS GPU Boost 1. Install the ASUS TurboV EVO utility from the motherboard support DVD. 2. Install the ASUS GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. 3. Click start > All Programs > ASUS > T urboV EVO > T urboV EVO . 4. Click More Settings from the T urboV EVO main screen, and then click GPU Boost. Y ou can adjust the GPU Engine Clock and GPU Voltage simultaneously in the TurboV Easy Mode . Adjustment sliders Start-up values T arget values Applies all changes immediately Undoes all changes without applying Click to restore all start-up settings
4-10 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.4 ASUS Unique Overclocking Utilityâ TurboV EVO ASUS T urboV EVO introduces T urboV , CPU Level UP and T urbo Key âthree powerful tools that allow you to overclock your system effectively . Install ASUS T urboV EVO from the support DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the T urboV EVO is correctly installed, you will înd the T urboV EVO icon on the Windows ® notiîcation area. Click on the icon to display the T urboV EVO control panel. ⢠Refer to the software manual in the support DVD or visit the ASUS website at www .asus.com for detailed software conîguration. ⢠When T urboV EVO is enabled, ASUS EPU will be set to High Performance mode automatically . 4.4.1 Using ASUS T urboV ASUS T urboV allow you to overclock the CPU frequency , CPU voltage, CPU/NB voltage, DRAM voltage, and the integrated GPU voltage/frequency in Windows ® environment and takes effect in real-time. Refer to the CPU documentation before adjusting CPU voltage settings. Setting a high voltage may damage the CPU permanently , and setting a low voltage may make the system unstable. For system stability , all changes made in ASUS TurboV (except for Auto T uning ) will not be saved to BIOS settings and will not be kept on the next system boot. Use the Save Proîle function to save your customized overclocking settings and manually load the proîle after Windows starts. ⢠GPU Boost is available only when you install the GPU Boost driver from the motherboard support DVD. ⢠For advanced overclock ability , adjust îrst the BIOS items, and then proceed more detailed adjustments using T urboV . Save the current settings as a new proîle Click to show / hide more settings Applies all changes immediately Undoes all changes without applying Adjustment sliders Advanced CPU and chipset voltage settings Click to restore all start-up settings Start-up values T arget values Load proîle Manual Mode Easy Mode Auto T uning Mode Advanced GPU settings CPU ratio setting for each CPU core
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-1 1 Chapter 4 4.4.2 Using ASUS T urboV Auto T uning Mode The Auto T uning Mode allows smart auto-overclocking. Follow the instructions below to let T urboV EVO detect and overclock your system. ⢠After pressing Start, the system starts performance tuning and may reboot 2 to 3 times. An error message indicating incorrect system shut down may appear after system reboot. Please ignore the message and continue the tuning process. In addition, please do not operate or manually restart the computer during the tuning process. ⢠The auto-tuned system performance varies with the installed devices such as the CPU and DRAM. ⢠The auto-tuning function overclocks your system settings, including the frequency and voltage of the CPU and DRAM. Installation of advanced cooling systems is recommended. ⢠The auto-tuned settings will be stored in system BIOS and will take effect after the system automatically reboots. 1. Click the Auto T uning tab and then click Start. Y ou can also click More Settings îrst to conîgure more overclocking parameters before starting auto-overclocking. 3. TurboV automatically overclocks the CPU, saves BIOS settings and restarts the system. After re-entering Windows, a message appears indicating auto tuning success. Click OK to exit. 2. Read through the warning messages and click Y es to start auto-overclocking.
4-12 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.4.3 Using CPU Level UP CPU Level UP allows you to upgrade your CPU at no additional cost. Pick a CPU level you want to overclock to, and CPU Level UP will do the rest for you. 2. Read through the warning messages and click Y es to start upgrading the CPU and restart the system. 1. Click the CPU Level UP tab, pick a CPU level you want to overclock to by adjusting the slider , and then click Apply . The CPU Level UP function support depends on CPU types. 4.4.4 Using ASUS T urbo Key ASUS T urbo Key allows the user to set a group of hotkeys into physical overclocking buttons. After the easy setup, T urbo Key can boost performances without interrupting ongoing work or gamesâwith just one touch! Conîguring ASUS T urbo Key 1. Click the T urbo K ey tab . 2. Selec t your desire d hotke y comb ination . 3. Y ou can decide the performance boost level by selecting T urbo Key Proîle . Y ou can also load personal proîles saved in the T urboV tab. 4. Choose whether to show T urbo Key OSD and status. 5. Click Apply to save T urbo Key settings. Y ou have to press the assigned hotkeys to use the T urbo Key function. 1 2 3 4 5
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-13 Chapter 4 4.5 RAID conî¿gurations The motherboard comes with the AMD ® SB850 chipset that allows you to conîgure Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID conîgurations: RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 10. ⢠Y ou must install Windows ® XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before using Serial A T A hard disk drives. The Serial A T A RAID feature is available only if you are using Windows ® XP SP2 or later versions. ⢠Due to Windows ® XP / V ista limitation, a RAID array with the total capacity over 2TB cannot be set as a boot disk. A RAID array over 2TB can only be set as a data disk only . ⢠If you want to install a Windows ® operating system to a hard disk drive included in a RAID set, you have to create a RAID driver disk and load the RAID driver during OS installation. Refer to section 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk for details. 4.5.1 RAID deînitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10 conîguration you get all the beneîts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup.
4-14 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. 4.5.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must enable the RAID function in the BIOS Setup before creating RAID volume(s) using SA T A HDDs. T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to the Main menu > Storage Conîguration, and then press <Enter>. 3. Set the OnChip SA T A T ype item to [RAID]. 4. Save your changes, and then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 3 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. When setting the OnChip SA T A T ype item to [RAID], all SA T A ports run at RAID mode. However , you can set the SA T A ports 5 and 6 to [Native IDE] or [AHCI] modes. See section 3.4.2 Storage Conîguration for details.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-15 Chapter 4 The Main Menu allows you to select an operation to perform. The Main Menu options include: ⢠View Drive Assignments: shows the status of the hard disk drives. ⢠LD View / LD Deîne Menu: displays the existing RAID set information / creates a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 or RAID 10 conîguration. ⢠Delete LD Menu: deletes a selected RAID set and partition. ⢠Controller Conîguration: shows the system resources conîguration. Press <1>, <2>, <3>, or <4> to enter the option you need; press <ESC> to exit the utility . The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only , and may not exactly match the items on your screen. T o create a RAID volume using more than four hard disk drives, ensure that the SA T A connectors 5/6 are set to [RAID] mode. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. View Drive Assignments ....... [ 1 ] LD View / LD Deî¿ne Menu ...... [ 2 ] Delete LD Menu ............... [ 3 ] Controller Conî¿guration ...... [ 4 ] [ Main Menu ] Press 1..4 to Select Option [ESC] Exit [ Keys Available ] 4.5.4 AMD ® Option ROM Utility T o enter the AMD ® Option ROM utility: 1. Boot up your computer . 2. During POST , press <Ctrl> <F> to display the utility main menu.
4-16 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 Creating a RAID volume T o create a RAID volume: 1. In the Main Menu, press <2> to enter the LD View / LD Deîne Menu function. 2. Press <Ctrl> <C>, and the following screen appears. 3. Move to the RAID Mode item and press <Space> to select a RAID mode to create. 4. Move to the Assignment item by using the down arrow key and set Y to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. 5. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to save the setting. 6. The utility prompts the following message. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to input the LD name. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [ â] Up [ â] Down [PaUp/PaDn] Switch page [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit [ Keys Available ] [ LD Deî¿ne Menu ] [ Drives Assignments ] Port:ID Drive Model Capabilities Capacity(GB) Assignment 01:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx Y 02:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx Y 03:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx N 04:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx N LD No LD Name RAID Mode Drv LD 1 Logical Drive 1 RAID 0 2 Strip Block 64 KB Fast Init ON Gigabyte Boundary ON Cache Mode WriteThru Please press Ctrl-Y key to input the LD Name or press any key to exit. If you do not input any LD name, the default LD name will be used. 7. Eenter an LD name, and then press any key to continue. Enter the LD name here: Fast Initialization Option has been selected It will erase the MBR data of the disks. <Press Ctrl-Y Key if you are sure to erase it> <Press any other key to ignore this option> 8. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to erase the MBR, or you may press any key to abort the settings. 9. Press <Ctrl> <Y> to enter the screen to modify the array capacity , or press any key to use the maximum capacity .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-17 Chapter 4 Deleting a RAID conîguration T ake caution when deleting a RAID volume. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID volume. T o delete a RAID volume: 1. In the Main Menu, press <3> to enter the Delete LD function. 2. Select the RAID item you want to delete and press <Del> or <Alt> <D>. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [ â] Up [ â] Down [PaUp/PaDn] Switch page [Del/Alt D] Delete LD [ Keys Available ] [ Delete LD Menu ] LD No RAID Mode Drv Capacity(GB) Status LD 1 RAID 0 2 xxxxxx Functional Dispalying a RAID set information T o display a RAID set information: 1. In the Main Menu, press <2> to enter the âLD View / LD Deîne Menuâ function. 2. Select a RAID item and press <Enter> to display its information. Option ROM Utility (c) 2009 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Any Key To Continue....... [ View LD Deî¿nation Menu ] [ Drives Assignments ] Port:ID Drive Model Capabilities Capacity(GB) 01:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx 02:00 xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx LD No LD Name RAID Mode Drv Capacity(GB) LD 1 xxxxx RAID 0 2 157.99 Strip Block 64 KB Cache Mode WriteThru 3. The utility prompts the following messages: Press <Ctrl> <Y> to delete the RAID volume. Press Ctrl-Y to delte the data in the disk! or press any other key to abort...
4-18 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 4.6 Creating a RAID driver disk A îoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. For Windows ® Vista or later operating systems, use either a USB îash drive with the RAID driver or the support DVD. ⢠The motherboard does not provide a îoppy drive connector. Y ou have to use a USB îoppy disk drive when creating a SA T A RAID driver disk. ⢠Windows ® XP may not recognize the USB îoppy disk drive due to Windows ® XP limitation. T o work around this OS limitation, refer to section 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive . 4.6.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID driver disk without entering the OS 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support DVD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. When the Make Disk menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 7. Insert a formatted îoppy disk into the USB îoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 8. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. 4.6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk in Windows ® T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® : 1. Start Windows ® . 2. Plug the USB îoppy disk drive and insert a îoppy disk. 3. Place the motherboard support DVD into the optical drive. 4. Go to the Make Disk menu, and then click AMD AHCI/RAID 32/64bit xxxx Driver to create a RAID driver disk. 5. Select USB îoppy disk drive as the destination disk. 6. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îoppy disk to avoid a computer virus infection. 4.6.3 Installing the RAID driver during Windows ® OS installation If you use a SA T A optical drive to run the OS installation disk, we strongly recommend that you install the optical dirve to the SA T A connectors 5/6 and set them to [Native IDE] mode. T o install the RAID driver for Windows ® XP 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver . 2. Pre ss <F6 >, a nd the n i nser t t he îop py di sk with RA ID dri ver int o t he USB î opp y di sk dri ve.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 4-19 Chapter 4 4.6.4 Using a USB îoppy disk drive Due to OS limitation, Windows ® XP may not recognize the USB îoppy disk drive when you install the RAID driver from a îoppy disk during the OS installation. T o solve this issue, add the USB îoppy disk driveâs V endor ID (VID) and Product ID (PID) to the îoppy disk containing the RAID driver . Refer to the steps below: 1. Using another computer , plug the USB îoppy disk drive, and insert the îoppy disk containing the RAID driver . 2. Right-click My Computer on the Windows ® desktop or start menu, and then select Manage from the pop-up window . 3. Select Device Manager . From the Universal Serial Bus controllers , right-click xxxxxx USB Floppy, and then select Properties from the pop-up window . The name of the USB îoppy disk drive varies with different vendors. or 3. When prompted to select the SCSI adapter to install, select the RAID driver for the corresponding OS version. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. T o install the RAID driver for Windows ® Vista or later OS 1. During the OS installation, click L oad Driver to allow you to select the installation media containing the RAID driver . 2. Insert the USB îash drive with RAID driver into the USB port or the support DVD into the optical drive, and then click Browse. 3. Click the name of the device youâve inserted, go to Drivers > RAID , and then select the RAID driver for the corresponding OS version. Click OK. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Before loading the RAID driver from a USB îash drive, you have to use another computer to copy the RAID driver from the support DVD to the USB îash drive. 4. Click Details tab. The V endor ID (VID) and Product ID (PID) are displayed.
4-20 Chapter 4: Software support Chapter 4 5. Browse the contents of the RAID driver disk to locate the île txtsetup.oem . 6. Double-click the île. A window appears, allowing you to select the program for opening the oem île. 7. Use Notepad to open the île. 8. Find the [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_i386_ahci8086] and [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_amd64_ahci] sections in the txtsetup.oem île. 9. T ype the following line to the bottom of the two sections: id = âUSB\VID_xxxx&PID_xxxxâ, âusbstorâ 10. Save and exit the île. Add the same line to both sections. The VID and PID vary with different vendors. [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_i386_ahci8086] id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4392&CC_0104â,âahcix86â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4391&CC_0106â,âahcix86â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4393&CC_0104â,âahcix86â id= âUSB\VID_03EE&PID_6901â, âusbstorâ [HardwareIds.SCSI.Napa_amd64_ahci] id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4392&CC_0104â,âahcix64â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4391&CC_0106â,âahcix64â id= âPCI\VEN_1002&DEV_4393&CC_0104â,âahcix64â id= âUSB\VID_03EE&PID_6901â, âusbstorâ
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-1 Chapter 5 5.1.2 Before you begin For A TI CrossFireX to work properly , you have to uninstall all existing graphics card drivers before installing A TI CrossFireX graphics cards to your system. T o uninstall all existing graphics card drivers: 1. Close all current applications. 2. For Windows XP , go to Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs . For Windows Vista, go to Control Panel > Programs and Features. 3. Select your current graphics card drivers. 4. For Windows XP , select Add/Remove . For Windows Vista, select Uninstall. 5. Turn of f your computer. 5.1 ATI ® CrossFireX⢠technology The mot her boar d s uppo rts the A T I ® Cro ssF ire X⢠t ech nolo gy that al low s yo u t o in sta ll mult i-g rap hics pr oces sin g un its (G PU) gra phic s c ard s. F oll ow t he ins tall ati on p roc edur es in this se cti on. 5.1.1 Requirements ⢠Prepare two identical CrossFireX-ready graphics cards or one CrossFireX-ready dual- GPU graphics card that are A TI ® certiîed. ⢠Ensure that your graphics card driver supports the A TI CrossFireX technology . Download the latest driver from the AMD website at www .amd.com. ⢠Ensure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at least the minimum power required by your system. See Chapter 2 for details. ⢠We recommend that you install additional chassis fans for better thermal environment. ⢠Visit the AMD A TI website for the latest graphics card support list. Chapter 5: ATI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5
5-2 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 4. Align and îrmly insert the CrossFireX bridge connector to the goldîngers on each graphics card. Ensure that the connector is îrmly in place. Goldîngers CrossFireX bridge (bundled with graphics cards) 5. Connect two independent auxiliary power sources from the power supply to the two graphics cards separately . 6. Connect a VGA or a DVI cable to the graphics card. 5.1.3 Installing two CrossFireX⢠graphics cards The following pictures are for reference only . The graphics cards and the motherboard layout may vary with models, but the installation steps remain the same. 1. Prepare two CrossFireX-ready graphics cards. 2. Insert the two graphics card into the PCIEX16 slots. If your motherboard has more than two PCIEX16 slots, refer to Chapter 2 in this user manual for the locations of the PCIEX16 slots recommended for multi-graphics card installation. 3. Ensure that the cards are properly seated on the slots.
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-3 Chapter 5 5.1.4 Installing the device drivers Refer to the documentation that came with your graphics card package to install the device drivers. Ensure that your PCI Express graphics card driver supports the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology . Download the latest driver from the AMD website (www.amd.com). 5.1.5 Enabling the A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology After installing your graphics cards and the device drivers, enable the CrossFireX⢠feature through the A TI Catalyst⢠Control Center in Windows environment. Launching the A TI Catalyst Control Center T o launch the A TI Catalyst Control Center 1. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop and select Catalyst(TM) Control Center . Y ou can also right- click the A TI icon in the Windows notiîcation area and select Cayalist Control Center. 2. The Catalyst Control Center Setup Assistant appears when the system detects the existance of multi-graphics cards. Click Go to continue to the Catalyst Control Center Advanced View window . Enabling CrossFireX settings 1. In the Catalyst Control Center window , click Graphics Settings > CrossFireX > Conîgure . 2. From the Graphics Adapter list, select the graphics card to act as the display GPU. 3. Select Enable CrossFireX . 4. Click Apply , and then click OK to exit the window . 4 3 2 1
5-4 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 5.2 ATI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology The motherboard supports the A TI ® Hybrid CrossFireX⢠technology that allows you to install multi-graphics processing units (GPU) CrossFireX cards. 5.2.1 System requirements Before using A TI Hybrid CrossFireX, ensure that your system meets the following basic requirements: ⢠Operating System: Windows ® Vista ⢠Memory capacity: Minimum 1GB ⢠CPU: AM3 ⢠On-board graphics card RAM: 256MB Visit the AMD A TI website for the latest graphics card support list. 5.2.2 Before you proceed Conîgure the BIOS settings for the graphics card to support A TI Hybrid CrossFireX. T o set Internal Graphics: 1. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-T est (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup utility . 2. Go to the Ai T weaker menu and set UMA Frame Buffer Size to [256M] or above 3. Select Advanced > Chipset > 890GX Conîguration > Internal Graphics Conîguration , set Surround View to [Enabled]. 4. Press <F10> to save the changes and exit BIOS settings. Select OK to conîrm. 5.2.3 Installing AMD Chipset Driver T o install the driver that supports Hybrid CrossFireX technology: 1. Insert the Support DVD that comes with your motherboard into the optical d rive. The DVD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the île ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. 2. From the Drivers menu, click AMD Chipset Driver to install it. Follow the onscreen instructions to înish the installation. 3. Restart your computer after the installation is completed. 4. When the system restarts, wait for a few seconds for the driver to load automatically .
ASUS M4A89GTD PRO 5-5 Chapter 5 5.2.4 Using the A TI ® CA T AL YST ® Control Center Using an add-on graphics card 1. Install a graphics card onto your motherboard. Refer to the User Guide that comes with your graphics card for details. 2. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 3. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then select the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation message pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 4. Click OK . The add-on graphics card is set to be the main monitor . Using the onboard graphics card 1. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, and then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 2. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then clear the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation message pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 3. Click OK .
5-6 Chapter 5: A TI ® CrossFireX⢠technology support Chapter 5 1. Follow steps 1 to 3 on Using the onboard graphics card. 2. From the A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center screen, click Display Manager > Graphics Adapter . Select A TI Radeon HD 3200 Graphics [Gabbs, G HW173] . Click OK, and then Y es from the conîrmation window . 3. Follow steps 6 to step 8 on Using the onboard graphics card to complete the process of setting up the onboard graphics card as your main monitor . If you are using both an add-on and the on-board graphics cards at same time and want to set the onboard graphics card as your main monitor , follow the below instructions. 4. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click Personalize from the shortcut menu. 5. Click Display Settings . Select [Default Monitor] on A TI Radeon HD 3200 Graphics , then select the check boxes of This is my main monitor and Extend the desktop onto this monitor . Click OK, and then Y es from the conîrmation window . 6. Restart the system. Right-click on the Windows ® desktop, then click A TI CA T AL YST(R) Control Center from the shortcut menu. The A TI CA T AL YST Control Center screen appears. 7. Click Graphics Settings > CrossFire⢠, then select the Enable CrossFire⢠check box. When a conîrmation pops up, click Y es . The screen blacks out for about one minute. 8. Click OK . The onboard graphics card is set to be the main monitor .
ASUS contact information ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. Address 15 Li-T e Road, Peitou, T aipei, T aiwan 1 1259 T elephone 886-2-2894-3447 Fax 886-2-2890-7798 E-mail info@asus.com.tw Web site www.asus.com.tw T echnical Support T elephone 86-21-3842991 1 Online support support.asus.com ASUS COMPUTER INTERNA TIONAL (America) Address 800 Corporate Way , Fremont, CA 94539, USA T elephone 1-812-282-3777 Fax 1-510-608-4555 Web site usa.asus.com T echnical Support T elephone 1-812-282-2787 Support fax 1-812-284-0883 Online support support.asus.com ASUS COMPUTER GmbH (Germany and Austria) Address Harkort Str. 21-23, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany Fax 49-2102-95991 1 Web site www.asus.de Online contact www .asus.de/sales T echnical Support T elephone 49-1805-010923 Support Fax 49-2102-9599-1 1 Online support support.asus.com
EC Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer: ASUSTek COMPUTER INC. Address, City: No. 150, LI-TE RD., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN R.O.C . Country: TAIWAN Authorized representative in Europe: ASUS COMPUTER GmbH Address, City: HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN Country: GERMANY declare the following apparatus: Product name : Mother board Model name : M4A89GTD PRO conform with the essential requirements of the following directives: 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2 006 A1:2007 EN 61000-3 -2:2006 EN 55013:2 001 A1:2003 A2:2006 EN 55024:1 998 A1:2001 A2:2003 EN 61000-3 -3:1995 A1:2001 A2:2005 EN 55020:2 007 1999/5/EC-R &TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.7.1(2006-05) EN 300 440-1 V1.4.1(2008-05) EN 300 440-2 V1.2.1(2008-03) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1(2007-05) EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1(2007-05) EN 301 893 V1.4.1(2005-03) EN 50360:2 001 EN 50371:2 002 EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1(2008-04) EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V1.3.2(2008-04) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1(2007-09) EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2(2007-06) EN 302 326-3 V1.3.1(2007-09) 2006/95/EC-L VD Directive EN 60950-1: 2001 A1 1:2004 EN 60950-1:2006 EN6006 5:2002 A1:2006 2005/32/EC-EuP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 EN 62301:2 005 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 EN 62301:2 005 CE marking Declaration Date: Jan. 18, 2010 Y ear to begin affixing CE marking:2010 Position : CEO Name : Jerry Shen Signature : __________ (EC conformity marking) DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC Part 2 Section 2. 1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Asus Computer International Address: 800 Corporate Way, Fremont , CA 94539. Phone/Fax No: (510)739-3777/(510)608-4555 hereby declares that the product Product Name : Mother board Model Number : M4A89GTD PRO Conforms to the following specifications: FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part B, Unintentional Radiators FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part C, Intentional Radiators FC C Pa rt 15, Sub part E, Intentional Radiators Supplementary Information: Thi s device compl ies with part 15 of the FCC Rules . Opera tion is subjec t to the fol lowi ng two condi tions: (1) Thi s devic e may not cau se harm ful int erfe rence, and (2) this devi ce must acc ept any int erfere nce recei ved, inc ludi ng int erfere nce th at may cause undes ired o perati on. Represent ative Personâs Name : Steve Chang / President Signature : Date : Jan. 18, 2010